Saab 2007 9 5 Owners Manual 95_US_M07

Saab-Saab-9-5-2007-Users-Manual-388171 saab-saab-9-5-2007-users-manual-388171

2007 to the manual 3f1e7f0c-e05c-4f58-8ab8-c8b0a13aa1e6

2015-09-07

: Saab Saab-2007-9-5-Owners-Manual-762927 saab-2007-9-5-owners-manual-762927 saab pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 288 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Owner’s Manual

Saab 9-5, Model Year 2007

Safety 11

Security 43

Instruments and controls 57

Saab 9-5 Audio System 3 90

Interior equipment and trunk 113

Starting and driving 139

Car care and technical information 189

Customer Assistance and Information 251

Specifications 257

Index 271

Service Readiness, Saab Automobile AB, Trollhättan, Sweden

Printed in Sweden

95_U S_M 07.book Page 1 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

Introduction

This manual provides practical guidance on

driving and caring for your Saab.

Although this manual describes the most

important differences between model vari-

ants, it does not include precise specifica-

tions of the different variants. Some differ-

ences also occur to meet special legal

requirements in different countries.

Importation and distribution of Saab auto-

mobiles, spare parts and accessories are

handled exclusively by General Motors of

Canada Limited in Canada and by Saab

Cars USA, Inc. in the U.S.A.

We recommend that you read through the

manual before taking the car out for the first

time and that you keep it in the car for future

reference.

To find a specific item, use the overviews

given on pages 3–6. A list of contents is

given at the beginning of each section of the

manual, and there is also a comprehensive

index at the back of the book.

Supplied with the car is a Warranty and Ser-

vice Record booklet and a tire warranty

folder which specifies the regular mainte-

nance to be carried out. The book also con-

tains important warranty conditions.

Since the policy at Saab is one of continual

improvement, we retain the right to incorpo-

rate modifications and to alter specifications

during production without prior notice.

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all

cars (can depend on model variant, engine

variant, market specification, options or

accessories).

If you have any questions concerning your

car, its equipment, the warranty conditions

or the like, your Saab dealer will be pleased

to help.

Best wishes,

Saab Automobile AB

Saab Automobile AB does not accept liability for

any damage caused by the fitting of spare parts,

exchange parts or accessories that are not

approved by Saab Automobile AB.

The specifications, design particulars and illus-

trations included in the manual are not binding.

WARNING

WARNING texts warn against the danger

of injury if the specified instructions are

not followed.

NOTICE

NOTICE texts warn of potential damage

to the car if the recommendations are not

followed.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 2 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

Instrument panel

IB3830

Indicator and warning lights______ 58

Speedometer_________________ 65

Odometer and trip meter ________ 64

Fuel gauge___________________ 65

Temperature gauge ____________ 65

Saab Information Display (SID) ___ 68

Parking lights____________ 73

High/low beam __________ 73

Daytime running lights_____ 73

Instrument illumination ____ 75

Changing bulbs __________ 204

Rear fog light____________ 74

NIGHT PANEL __________ 72

Turn signal and lane change

indicators ______________ 75

High beam flasher________ 73

Cruise control 3_________ 159

Front fog lights 3_________ 76

NIGHT PANEL __________ 72

Power Outlet 3________________ 126

Wipers and washers______ 77

Rear-window wiper

(SportCombi) 3_________ 78

Rain sensing wipers 3____ 77

Washers _______________ 203

Wipers and washers______ 202

Saab 9-5 Audio System 3_ 90

Steering wheel controls 3_ 91

Hazard warning lights_____ 76

Automatic climate control

(ACC) ________________ 79

Air conditioning (ACC) ____ 243

Heated front seats 3___________ 87

Head restraint ________________ 21

Steering wheel controls 3_______ 91

Sentronic, manual mode 33 ____ 156

95_U S_M 07.book Page 3 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

Exterior

IB3831

Driving with a roof rack load______ 179

Fitting the roof carriers 3________ 179

Maximum roof load ____________ 258

Rearview mirror _______________ 118

Hood _______________________ 190

Engine compartment: washing ___ 242

Central locking __________ 44

Trunk lid lock, 9-5 Sedan __ 47

Tailgate, 9-5 SportCombi __ 48

Child safety locks ________ 47

Car alarm 3____________ 50

Headlights _____________ 73

High/low beam __________ 73

Turn signal and lane change

indicators______________ 75

Headlight washers 3_____ 77

Changing bulbs _________ 204

Fuel gauge___________________ 65

Refueling ____________________ 146

Economical motoring ___________ 170

Fuel ________________________ 260

Tires pressure ________________ 267

Wheels and tires ______________ 266

Braking______________________ 160

Driving in cold weather__________ 172

Compact spare tire_____________ 234

Changing a wheel _____________ 236

Trunk _______________________ 129

Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Sedan __ 129

Folding the rear seat,

9-5 SportCombi ______________ 132

Trunk Release Handle__________ 138

Driving with a spare wheel fitted __ 183

Compact spare tire ____________ 234

Towing a trailer 3________ 174

Towing the car ___________ 183

Rear towing eye _________ 184

Headlights______________ 73

Rear light cluster, 9-5 Sedan 208

Rear lights clusters,

9-5 SportCombi _________ 210

Changing bulbs __________ 204

Moonroof 3_____________ 123

Washing the car _________ 241

Waxing and polishing _____ 242

Touching up the paint _____ 242

Anti-corrosion treatment ___ 245

95_U S_M 07.book Page 4 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

Interior

IB3832

Rearview mirrors ______________ 116

Door mirrors__________________ 116

Sun visors ___________________ 125

Safety belts ____________ 12

Airbag_________________ 29

Child safety ____________ 22

Child safety locks ________ 47

Safety belts, maintenance _ 239

Glove compartment ______ 126

Manual transmission _____ 150

Automatic transmission 3_ 151

Electric windows ______________ 115

Ignition switch ________________ 140

Starting the engine ____________ 141

Engine Break-In Period _________ 150

Driving in hot weather __________ 173

Driving in cold weather _________ 172

Parking _____________________ 165

Steering wheel adjustment _ 114

Airbag _________________ 29

Power steering fluid_______ 198

Steering wheel controls 3__ 91

Sentronic, manual mode 33 156

Seats__________________ 18

Heated front seats 3______ 87

Head restraint 3_________ 21

Safety belts _____________ 12

Child safety _____________ 22

Folding the rear seat,

9-5 Sedan _____________ 129

Folding the rear seat,

9-5 SportCombi _________ 132

Upholstery and trim_______ 240

Side airbags ____________ 36

Interior lighting________________ 124

Moonroof 3__________________ 123

Dome light, front ______________ 214

95_U S_M 07.book Page 5 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

Engine compartment

IB3636

Engine ______________________ 194

Checking the oil level ___________ 194

Engine oil, specification _________ 261

Braking______________________ 160

ABS brakes __________________ 161

Brake and clutch fluid___________ 196

Brake system _________________ 265

Brake pads___________________ 265

Fuses _________________ 216

Changing a fuse _________ 218

Relays ________________ 220

Table of fuses ___________ 216

Temperature gauge ______ 65

Driving in hot weather_____ 173

Driving in cold weather____ 172

Coolant _______________ 195

Coolant capacity_________ 260

Power steering fluid_______ 198

Steering, technical data ___ 265

Wipers and washers______ 77

Washers _______________ 203

Washer jets ____________ 203

Jump starting _________________ 186

Battery ______________________ 199

Charging/replacing the battery____ 200

Manual transmission ___________ 150

Automatic transmission 3_______ 151

Automatic transmission,

technical data ________________ 264

Manual gearbox, technical data___ 264

Important considerations for driving 144

Turbo unit ___________________ 191

Engine, technical data__________ 260

Ignition switch ___________ 140

Drive belts ______________ 201

Spark plugs _____________ 263

Catalytic converter _______ 145

Warning labels __________ 7

V.I.N. number ___________ 268

Engine number __________ 268

Gearbox number _________ 268

Color code______________ 268

Tire and Loading Information

Label _________________ 231

95_U S_M 07.book Page 6 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

Battery

• No sparks, flames or smoking.

• Shield eyes, explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

• Sulphuric acid can cause blindness or severe burns.

• Flush eyes immediately with water. Get medical help fast.

• Do not tip battery. Do not open battery.

KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN

Brake fluid

CLEAN FILLER CAP BEFORE

REMOVING. USE ONLY DOT 4

FLUID FROM SEALED CON-

TAINER.

Radiator fan

Radiator fan may start at

any time.

IB336

A/C system

Refrigerant at high pressure.

Do not loosen or remove the A/C system fittings before

discharging the A/C system. Improper service methods

may cause personal injury. System to be serviced by

authorized personnel only. For instructions consult

workshop manual.

The A/C system complies with SAE J639.

Charge: 825 g of R134a.

Compressor oil: PAG oil SP-10 alt.

Saab oil 4759106

Oil amount: See workshop manual.

Warning labels

Maintenance Free

P/N 127 93 955

12V 60Ah 580A (EN)

000 A-12102-EP

LEVEL INDICATOR

DARK OK

CLEAR LOW

• AVOID SPARKS AND OPEN FLAMES,

NO SMOKING

• WEAR EYE PROTECTION

• KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN

•ACID

• SEE OWNER’S MANUAL

• FLAMMABLE GAS

Coolant:

Never open when engine hot!

95_U S_M 07.book Page 7 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

IB336

WARNING

EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS

• Children can be killed or seriously

injured by the air bag.

• The back seat is the safest place for

children.

• Never put a rear-facing child seat in

the front.

• Always use seat belts and child

restraints.

Contact a Saab dealer if a

xenon headlight requires

replacement.

This label is only found on

cars with xenon head-

lights.

Jack

Use only on specified vehicles. Safe working load 1100

kg. Use on level firm ground only. Do not get under a

vehicle that is supported only by a jack, use vehicle sup-

port stands.

For more information see your owner´s manual.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 8 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

No sparks, fla-

mes or smo-

king.

Buckle up

Use protective

goggles Airbag

Keep out of

reach of

children.

Never place a

rear-facing

child seat in

this seat.

Battery acid

contains

sulfuric acid.

Electric

windows

Refer to the

Owner’s

Manual.

Deactivating

of rear window

switches

Risk of

explosive gas.

Central

locking, lock

Central

locking,

unlock

Tr un k

lid/tailgate,

opening

Headlights Windshield

wipers

Direction

indicators

Windshield

washers

Parking lights Defroster

Hazard

warning lights

Rear window

heating

Front fog

lights Ventilation fan

Rear fog

light

Coolant

temperature Radiator fan

Battery

charging Fuel

Foot brake

Coolant level

Engine oil

pressure

ABS brakes

Examples of symbols that can be found in your car

95_U S_M 07.book Page 9 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

(This page has been left blank)

95_U S_M 07.book Page 10 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

11Safety

Seats _______________ 18

Head restraint ________ 21

Safety belts __________ 12

Child safety __________ 22

Airbag_______________ 29

IB3835

Safety

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,

market specification, options or accessories).

95_U S_M 07.book Page 11 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

12 Safety

Safety belts Three-point inertia-reel safety belts are pro-

vided for all seats.

The results of studies show that it is equally

important to wear safety belts in the rear

seat as in the front seats.

Bear in mind that in certain states/provinces

it is a legal requirement for all occupants of

the car to wear a safety belt.

Safety belt reminder

When the ignition is switched on, the ”FAS-

TEN BELTS” reminder will light up until the

driver fastens the safety belt.

The reminder for the driver has an additional

audible signal which sounds for 6 seconds,

or until the driver fastens his belt.

The following applies to the both front

seats: If the belt is not fastened before the

car starts to move there will be an additional

reminder when the speed exceeds 15 mph

(25 km/h). The text Use your seatbelts. is

lit on the Saab Information Display (SID)

and the symbol will flash.

If the belt is not fastened then an audible

signal will come on after 30 seconds.

The text in the SID can be turned off by the

CLR-button on the steering wheel.

WARNING

• Buckle up and adjust your safety belt

before driving off so that you can pay

full attention to the traffic.

• Safety belts must be worn at all times

by all car occupants.

• Child safety, see page 22.

• Check that the locking tongue is prop-

erly locked in the belt lock.

• In the event of a crash, the rear-seat

passengers not wearing a seatbelt will

be thrown forward against the

front-seat backrests. The stresses

imposed on the front seat passengers

and belts are multiplied and can result

in needless injury or even death for all

car occupants.

FASTEN BELTS

IB3838

95_U S_M 07.book Page 12 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

13Safety

Correct position for safety belt • Position the lap strap snugly and low

across the hips so that it just touches the

thighs. The shoulder strap must be as far

in on the shoulder as possible.

• Check to ensure that the belt is not twisted

or rubbing against any sharp edges.

• There should not be any slack in the belt.

Pull the belt tight – particularly important

when thick outer clothing is worn. It

is advisable to remove thick items of

clothing.

• Refrain from tilting the backrest more than

necessary, as the safety belt provides

better protection when the seat is in a

more upright position.

• Only one person per safety belt!

• For most of the time a safety belt is worn,

the retractor will allow the wearer freedom

of movement. The retractor locks up auto-

matically if the belt is jerked or withdrawn

sharply, the car tilts, the brakes are

applied hard or a crash occurs.

• Children up to 6 years of age must always

be seated in a child seat. Saab recom-

mends the use of a child seat for children

up to the age of 10.

• Children who have grown out of a child

seat should be restrained by the car’s

standard three-point belts. Make sure that

the shoulder belt is not in contact with the

neck or throat. If it is, a booster seat/cush-

ion may be necessary.

WARNING

Proper positioning of the safety belt is

extremely important.

• An out of position safety belt can result

in the occupant sliding underneath the

belt in a crash (submarining) and

injury can result from the lap portion

cutting into the abdomen.

•Never fasten the safety belt with the

shoulder belt behind the body or pull

the belt off the shoulder and under the

arm.

• If two people share a belt, they risk

injury by being crushed together in the

event of a crash.

IB410

Correctly positioned safety belt

95_U S_M 07.book Page 13 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

14 Safety

Front safety belts

Fasten the belt by pulling the belt and insert-

ing the tongue in the buckle. Check that it is

securely fastened.

Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle

and pull the belt towards the shoulder to

tighten the lap belt part.

Then grip the belt at the shoulder, pull it out

and, without letting go, allow the slack to be

taken up by the reel. Make sure that the belt

is well in on the shoulder.

Because the lower belt-anchorage points

are on the seat, the belt buckle follows the

movement of the seat during seat adjust-

ment.

To release the belt, press the red button on

the belt buckle, as illustrated.

See page 239 for the checking of belt func-

tion, cleaning, etc.

Belt height adjustment

The front safety belts and the outside belts

in the rear (9-5 Sedan) are equipped with

automatic height adjustment.

After fastening the belt, grasp it at chest

height, pull it out and, without letting go,

allow the slack to be taken up by the reel.

Make sure that the belt is well in on the

shoulder.

IB411

To fasten the belt

IB412

Press the red button to release the belt

95_U S_M 07.book Page 14 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

15Safety

Safety belt use during pregnancy

Pregnant women must always wear a

safety belt to protect both themselves and

the unborn child.

The lap belt should be placed low, across

the hips and over the upper thighs.

Safety belt pretensioners

The belts of the front seats are fitted with

automatic pretensioners and force limiters.

These are activated in the event of a severe

frontal or rear-end crash and a side-on col-

lision, provided that the safety belts are

being worn.

The pretensioners serve to reduce the for-

ward movement of the body by tensioning

the belt. The force limiters reduce belt loads

on the body by "loosening" the safety belt to

absorb the body’s kinetic energy as gradu-

ally as possible.

The safety belt pretensioners are not acti-

vated by vehicle rollover.

Safety belt, rear seat

WARNING

If the car is involved in a crash, the safety

belts, belt pretensioners and other com-

ponents must be inspected by an autho-

rized Saab dealer and replaced as neces-

sary.

Never make any alterations or repairs to

the safety belt yourself. Visit an autho-

rized Saab dealer for any necessary

repairs.

WARNING

• Make sure that the belt does not

become trapped when the backrest is

folded down or raised (see page 129).

• If cargo has to be placed on a seat, it

must be properly secured with the

safety belt. This reduces the risk of the

cargo being thrown about during hard

braking or a crash, which could cause

personal injury.

• Check that the belt is not twisted or

lying against sharp edges.

• Make sure you use the correct safety

belt buckle. The buckles for the center

and left-hand rear seats are close

together.

IB414

95_U S_M 07.book Page 15 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

16 Safety

Three-point safety belts are provided for all

three rear seat passengers.

Fasten the belt by pulling out the strap care-

fully and inserting the tongue in the lock.

Check that it is securely fastened.

Then grip the diagonal part of the strap near

the lock and pull the belt upwards towards

the shoulder to tighten the lap strap. The lap

strap should lie low over the hips.

The diagonal part should lie as far in on the

shoulder as possible.

To release the belt, press the red button on

the belt lock.

See page 239 for the checking of belt func-

tion, cleaning, etc.

IB???IB415

Safety belt, rear seat

IB416

Securing an item on the rear seat

95_U S_M 07.book Page 16 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

17Safety

WARNING

• Safety belts are designed to bear upon

the bony structure of the body, and

should be worn low across the front of

the pelvis or the pelvis, chest and

shoulders, as applicable; wearing the

lap section of the belt across the

abdominal area must be avoided.

• Safety belts should be adjusted as

firmly as possible, consistent with

comfort, to provide the protection for

which they have been designed. A

loose belt will greatly reduce the pro-

tection afforded to the wearer.

• Care should be taken to avoid contam-

ination of the webbing with polishes,

oils and chemicals, and particularly

battery acid. Cleaning may safely be

carried out using mild soap and water.

The belt should be replaced if webbing

becomes frayed, contaminated or

damaged.

• It is essential to replace the entire

assembly after it has been worn in a

severe impact even if damage to the

assembly is not obvious.

• Belts should not be worn with straps

twisted.

• Each belt assembly must only be used

by one occupant; it is dangerous to put

a belt around a child being carried on

the occupant´s lap.

• No modifications or additions should

be made by the user which will either

prevent the safety belt adjusting

device from operating to remove

slack, or prevent the safety belt

assembly from being adjusted to

remove slack.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 17 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

18 Safety

Seats

Both front seats are electrically operated.

On certain models the driver´s seat is

equipped with a memory function.

To facilitate getting into the car, both seats

can be adjusted when either of the front

doors is open.

For safety reasons, if the door is closed, the

seat can only be adjusted when the ignition

is ON.

Note, however, that both seats can be

adjusted for 30 seconds after both doors

have been closed.

The following seat adjustments can be

made to achieve a comfortable driving

position:

• height

• legroom

• backrest rake angle

• lumbar support 3

• head-restraint height

We recommend that adjustments to the

driver’s seat be performed in the following

order:

1height

2 legroom

3 seat tilt angle

4 backrest rake angle

Lastly, adjust the steering wheel (see

page 114).

Side airbags

(see page 36).

Head restraint

(see page 21).

Height

To raise the seat, lift the lower control

straight up.

To lower the seat, press the lower control

down.

The same control can be used to adjust the

height of the front and rear edges of the seat

independently.

WARNING

The seats are actuated by powerful

motors. Bear this in mind when adjusting

the seat, and make sure that nothing gets

caught and damaged. Ensure that noth-

ing can be trapped when adjusting the

seat.

Bear in mind that children can be injured

if they play with the electrically-operated

seats.

Always remove the ignition key when you

leave the car. This prevents personal

injury caused by the electrically adjust-

able seats, for example, due to children

playing.

WARNING

Never adjust the driver’s seat except

when the car is stationary.

IB3225

95_U S_M 07.book Page 18 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

19Safety

Legroom adjustment

To adjust the legroom, push the lower con-

trol forward or back.

Backrest rake angle

To adjust the backrest, move the upper con-

trol forward or back.

Lumbar support 3

Turn the smaller wheel for stepless adjust-

ment of the lumbar support.

WARNING

The backrest should be upright during

driving, so that the safety belt, airbag and

backrest can provide optimum protection

in the event of emergency braking or a

crash and in particular a rear-end

collision.

IB3226

IB3227

IB1161

95_U S_M 07.book Page 19 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

20 Safety

Memory driver’s seat 3

In certain models the driver´s seat is

equipped with a programmable memory

function. This function also includes the

door mirrors.

Adjust the seat and door mirrors.

To save the settings, press and hold the M

button and, at the same time, press one of

the preselect buttons (1, 2 or 3). The Saab

Information Display (SID) will chime to con-

firm that the settings have been saved.

To recall the programmed settings, press

and hold the appropriate preset button,

whereupon the seat and mirrors will be

adjusted automatically.

To change the settings stored in a preset

button, adjust the seat and mirrors as before

and save the new settings by pressing M

and the appropriate preset button.

To facilitate reversing, the passenger side

door mirror can be tilted down automati-

cally, e.g. to show the curb. To do this,

select reverse and press the small grey

button adjacent to the door-mirror control.

When you deselect reverse, the mirror will

automatically return to its original setting

(see page 116).

IB404

95_U S_M 07.book Page 20 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

21Safety

Head restraint

The front seats in the Saab 9-5 are

equipped with Saab Active Head Restraints

(SAHRs). These reduce the risk of whiplash

injury if the car is hit from behind.

In the event of a rear-end crash, the body is

forced back against the backrest. This, in

turn, causes the mechanism to press the

head restraint forward and upward, thus lim-

iting the backward movement of the head.

The SAHR is a mechanical system, actu-

ated by body weight. The mechanism is built

into the top of the backrest, where it is con-

nected to the head restraint.

Therefore, the SAHR does not need to be

replaced after a minor rear-end crash.

The head restraint can be raised or lowered

and is adjustable in various positions.

• Raising: grasp the head restraint on both

sides and pull it straight up.

• Lowering: press the catch on the left-hand

side of the attaching point and press down

the head restraint.

Rear-seat head restraints

9-5 Sedan: The rear head restraints have

three adjustment positions for passenger

comfort.

They can also be folded down to increase

the driver’s rearward vision when the seat is

unoccupied.

9-5 SportCombi: The height of the rear

head restraints can be adjusted by depress-

ing the catch on the left-hand collar in the

same way as the front head restraints.

WARNING

• Adjust the head restraint so that your

head is optimally supported and the

center of the head restraint is at ear

height, thus reducing the likelihood of

neck injury in a crash.

• Raise the head restraints in the seat

that are occupied.

IB400

IB460

95_U S_M 07.book Page 21 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

22 Safety

Child safety

Car safety tips

For Trunk Release Handle information see

page 48 and 138.

WARNING

• Children must always be suitably

restrained in the car.

•ALWAYS use SAFETY BELTS and

CHILD RESTRAINTS.

•NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in

the front.

• DEATH or SERIOUS

INJURY can occur.

• Children 12 and under or

shorter than 55 inches

(140 cm) can be killed by

the airbag.

• Sit as far back as possible from the air-

bag.

• The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place

for children.

WARNING

•Never leave children unattended in a

car, even for a short time.

– Children can suffer heat stroke – per-

haps die – in a matter of minutes.

– Children can put the car into gear and

hurt themselves or others.

• At gas stations, take the keys from the

car while filling the tank.

•Never allow children to climb on top of

– or under cars.

•Always look for children before back-

ing your car out of a garage or drive-

way.

• To avoid carbon monoxide poisoning,

never let a car idle in an enclosed

garage.

• Supervise young children around

buckets of water while washing your

car. Small children can drown in a

short time in less than an inch of water.

WARNING

Protect children from getting

trapped in the trunk of a car

• Teach children not to play in or around

cars.

• Watch children when loading or

unloading the car so they don’t get

locked in by mistake.

•Always lock the doors and trunk of

your car, and keep the keys out of chil-

dren´s sight and reach.

• Keep the rear fold-down seats closed

to help prevent kids from getting into

the trunk from inside the car.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 22 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

23Safety

The same attention must be given to child

safety in the car as is given to adults.

Saab recommends rearward facing child

restraints.

Children travel most safely when properly

restrained, but restraints must be suitable

for the size of the child. Always follow the

child seat/booster cushion manufacturer´s

instructions when installing these devices in

your vehicle.

Make sure you are acquainted with the

legal requirements for seating children

in the car.

Make sure that it is possible to fit a child

restraint in accordance with the manufac-

turer’s child seat instructions.

When fitting child seats in cars you must

always read the instructions supplied by

the manufacturer.

Lower Anchorages and Top

Tethers for Children (LATCH

System)

Your vehicle has the LATCH system. There

are LATCH anchors for the outboard seat-

ing positions of the second row, and a top

tether anchor on the center position.

This system, designed to make installation

of child restraints easier, does not use the

vehicle's safety belts. Instead, it uses vehi-

cle anchors and child restraint attachments

to secure the restraints. Only use the attach-

ments and straps provided with the child

restraint.

If you have any questions regarding LATCH

anchors, please contact your Saab dealer.

WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint is not

attached to its anchor points, the restraint

will not be able to protect the child cor-

rectly. In a crash, the child could be seri-

ously injured or killed. Make sure that a

LATCH-type child restraint is properly

installed using the anchor points, or use

the vehicle's safety belts to secure the

restraint, following the instructions that

came with that restraint, and also the

instructions in this manual.

WARNING

Child top tether anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted child restraints.

Under no circumstances are they to be

used for adult safety belts.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 23 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

24 Safety

IB1684

Rigid 2-point lower attachment with top

tether

IB1685

Semi-rigid 2-point lower attachment with

top tether

IB3839

Location of lower anchors

Lower anchor and top tether anchor loca-

tions.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 24 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

25Safety

Securing a Child Restraint

Designed for the LATCH System

9-5 SportCombi:

Before installation, please read through

these instructions and the child restraint

installation instructions.

1 The top tether anchor is located on the

cargo floor by the rear seat backrest's

lower part (see picture). To access the

top tether anchor, unlock the rear seat

backrest (see page 132 for detailed

instructions), and fold it slightly forward.

Note! Backrest only, not the seat cush-

ion.

2 The top tether anchor is originally

rotated downwards. To use it, it has to

be rotated upwards (see arrow in pic-

ture). Use the top tether anchor right

behind the seating position you want to

use.

3 Raise the vehicle head restraint to its

highest position (see page 21 for

detailed instructions).

4 Put the child restraint on the seat.

5 If you are using a single tether, route the

tether under the vehicle head restraint,

and attach the tether hook to the top

tether anchor. If you are using a dual

tether, route the tether around the vehi-

cle head restraint, and attach the tether

hook to the top tether anchor. The child

restraint instructions will show you

how.

6 Reposition the rear seat backrest, and

make sure it locks properly. Check the

indicator on top of the backrest that it is

locked.

7 Find the lower anchors for the seating

position you want to use. The lower

anchors are located where the bottom of

the seatback meets the back of the seat

cushion. Above each lower anchor,

there is a label indicating its location

(see picture on page 24).

8 Attach and tighten the lower anchor

attachments on the child restraint to the

vehicle lower anchors. If your child

restraint does not have the lower attach-

ments, you will be using the lap-shoul-

der belt to secure the child restraint. The

child restraint instructions will show

you how.

9 Tighten the top tether strap according to

the child restraint instructions.

10 Push and pull the child restraint in differ-

ent directions to be sure it is secured at

the lower anchors/safety belt and the top

tether anchor. The child restraint shall

be firmly attached to the vehicle.

WARNING

Make sure the child restraint anchorages

are folded all the way up or down other-

wise it can obstruct locking the rear seat

backrest.

WARNING

If a cargo net is fitted, do not pull the top

tether strap through the cargo net in such

a way that there is slack in the strap to the

child seat.

IB4113

Child tether anchorages, Saab 9-5 Sport-

Combi

95_U S_M 07.book Page 25 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

26 Safety

Securing a Child Restraint

Designed for the LATCH System

9-5 Sedan:

Before installation, please read through

these instructions and the child restraint

installation instructions.

1 Find the lower anchors for the seating

position you want to use. The lower

anchors are located where the bottom of

the seatback meets the back of the seat

cushion. Above each lower anchor,

there is a label indicating its location

(see picture).

2 Put the child restraint on the seat.

3 Attach and tighten the lower anchor

attachments on the child restraint to the

vehicle lower anchors. If your child

restraint does not have the lower attach-

ments, you will be using the lap-shoul-

der belt to secure the child restraint. The

child restraint instructions will show

you how.

4 The top tether anchor is located on top

of the parcel shelf. Use the top tether

anchor right behind the seating position

you want to use. Open the top tether

anchor trim cover to expose the anchor.

Snap the cover to lock in open position.

5 Raise the vehicle head restraint to its

highest position (see page 21 for

detailed instructions).

6 If you are using a single tether, route the

tether under the vehicle head restraint,

and attach the tether hook to the top

tether anchor. If you are using a dual

tether, route the tether around the vehi-

cle head restraint, and attach the tether

hook to the top tether anchor. Tighten

the top tether strap. The child restraint

instructions will show you how.

7 Push and pull the child restraint in differ-

ent directions to be sure it is secured at

the lower anchors/safety belt and the top

tether anchor. The child restraint shall

be firmly attached to the vehicle.

IB1698

Child tether anchorages in parcel shelf,

Saab 9-5 Sedan

95_U S_M 07.book Page 26 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

27Safety

Lockable latch plate

In fitting a child seat that is intended to be

secured in position by the lap portion of the

safety belt, make use of the locking function

of the latch plate. This function is available

on all seats in the second row.

Locking the lap portion of the belt lessens

the risk that the seat will work loose while

the car is in motion.

The button for the locking function is located

on the back of the latch plate.

1 Put the child restraint on the rear seat.

2 Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap

and shoulder portions of the vehicle's

safety belt through or around the

restraint. The child restraint instruc-

tions will show you how.

3 Buckle the belt. Make sure the release

button is positioned so you would be

able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if

you ever had to.

4 Tighten the safety belt. You may find it

helpful to use your knee to push down on

the child restraint as you tighten the belt.

5 While holding the safety belt tight, acti-

vate the locking function of the latch

plate by moving the button from position

2 (unlocked) to position 1 (locked).

6 Push and pull the child restraint in differ-

ent directions to be sure it is secure. The

child restraint shall be firmly attached to

the vehicle.

To deactivate the locking function, move the

button to position 2.

IB822

Locking the lap belt

1 Locked

2 Unlocked

95_U S_M 07.book Page 27 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

28 Safety

Installation of rear facing child restraints

Child restraints that are approved for rear

facing installation in the rear seat can be

positioned in any of the three rear seating

positions.

WARNING

Failure to follow all the manufacturer’s

instructions on the use of this child

restraint system can cause your child to

strike the vehicle´s interior during a

sudden stop or crash.

WARNING

A special accessory is available for lock-

ing the center armrest so that a child seat

can be installed in the middle seat. See

your Saab dealer for details.

When a rear-facing child seat is fitted in

the center position of the rear seat in the

Saab 9-5 Sedan the center armrest must

be secured in place with this strap. If this

is not done, the center armrest could

swing down in the event of a frontal crash

and cause injury to the child.

IB1204

Fitting the locking strap on the center arm-

rest, Saab 9-5 Sedan (not needed on

SportCombi).

95_U S_M 07.book Page 28 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

29Safety

Airbag

The AIRBAG system comprises an airbag in

the steering wheel, a front passenger airbag

and side airbags in the front seats.

The system supplements the protection

provided by the safety belts to further

enhance the safety of the occupants.

If a fault is detected in the AIRBAG, the

AIR BAG warning light on the main instru-

ment panel will come on (see pages 61

and 37).

When the system is triggered by impact of a

frontal crash, the airbags in the steering

wheel and passenger side of the dash board

are inflated, after which they deflate through

vents in the back of the bags.

The entire process takes less than

0.1 second – literally, faster than the blink-

ing of an eye.

The driver and passenger airbags are

referred to as ‘smart’ airbags. This means

that the system compensates for factors

such as the force of the collision.

Note:

The sensor reacts differently depending on

whether or not the front seatbelts on the

driver’s and passenger sides are used. Sit-

uations can therefore arise where only one

of the airbags inflates.

It is also possible for only the seatbelt pre-

tensioners to be activated and for the air-

bags to remain uninflated.

These airbags are triggered only by moder-

ate to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes.

They will not be activated by minor front-end

impacts, rear-end or side impacts, or by the

car rolling over.

WARNING

To reduce risk of injury:

•Always wear your safety belt.

•Always adjust your seat so that you

are as far back as possible but still

able to operate the pedals and reach

the steering wheel and controls com-

fortably.

• Children 12 and under or shorter than

59 inches (150 cm) should always

travel in the rear seat as the car is fitted

with a passenger airbag.

•Never fit a child seat in front of the pas-

senger airbag.

IB419

Inflated airbag (driver side)

Inflation and deflation together take less than

0.1 second.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 29 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

30 Safety

WARNING

• Even if the car is equipped with AIR-

BAG, safety belts must still always be

worn by all occupants.

• Note that because an airbag inflates

and deflates extremely rapidly, it will

not provide protection against a

second impact occurring in the same

incident. Always use your safety belt.

•Always sit with the whole of your back

in contact with the backrest of the seat,

and with your seat as far back as is

practical. Otherwise you will be thrown

back against the backrest when the

airbag inflates which could cause you

injury or death. The airbag needs

room in which to inflate.

•Never attach anything to the steering

wheel or passenger side of the instru-

ment panel, as this could result in

injury if the airbag should inflate. The

same applies to anything you might

have in your mouth, such as a pipe, for

instance.

• Some components of the airbag will

be warm for a short time. In some cir-

cumstances the airbag can cause

minor burns or abrasions to the body

when the airbag inflates/deflates.

• To reduce the risk of head injuries in

the event of a crash, the headliner and

pillar trims incorporate energy absorb-

ing material. These areas must not be

modified in any way. Work on these

areas must only be carried out by an

authorized Saab dealer.

• Fumes are generated by the chemical

reaction that inflates the airbag.

Because the dust/fumes can, in cer-

tain cases, cause irritation to the skin,

the following measures should be

taken:

Skin surfaces that show signs of irrita-

tion should be washed with clean

water and a mild soap as soon as pos-

sible.

In the event of eye irritation, flush the

eyes thoroughly with clean water for at

least 20 minutes.

In case of persistent irritation, consult

a doctor.

•Never rest your hands or forearms on

the steering-wheel center padding.

• If the AIR BAG warning light does not

extinguish after the car has been

started, or comes on or flashes while

driving, have the car checked immedi-

ately by a workshop. We recommend

that you contact an authorized Saab

dealer. The warning light could signify

that the airbags may not inflate in a

crash, or they could even inflate with-

out a crash. See page 61.

IB420

Passenger airbag and driver’s airbag both

inflated

95_U S_M 07.book Page 30 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

31Safety

IB3840

AIRBAG system with belt pretensioners

1 Central sensor

2 Belt pretensioners (for both front safety belts)

3 Steering wheel with integral airbag

4 Passenger airbag

5 Side-airbag sensor

6 Side airbag

7 Front sensors

IB3841

Accessories and other equipment must

not be fitted to the surfaces marked as

these are where the airbags inflate in the

event of a crash.

IB417

Moment of impact.

The sensors detect

deceleration and send

a signal via the cen-

tral sensor to the gas

generator that inflates

the airbag.

The inflating airbag

cushions the driver.

Airbag now fully

inflated.

The airbag starts to

deflate.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 31 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

32 Safety

Front passenger seat

The airbags are interconnected and have a

common warning light. The passenger

airbag module is housed in the fascia above

the glove compartment and is marked

AIRBAG

Both airbags will be inflated in the event of a

moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal

crash, even if the passenger seat is unoccu-

pied.

WARNING

Never secure a rear-facing child seat in

the right front seat of a car equipped with

a passenger airbag. Inflation of the airbag

in the event of a crash could seriously

injure or kill a child.

WARNING

• DEATH or SERIOUS

INJURY can occur.

• Children 12 and under or

shorter than 59 inches

(150 cm) can be killed by

the airbag.

• The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place

for children.

• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in

the front.

• Sit as far back as possible from the air-

bag.

• ALWAYS use SAFETY BELTS and

CHILD RESTRAINTS.

•Never allow a child to stand in front of

the seat or to sit on the lap of a

front-seat passenger. Serious injury or

death could result if the airbag is

inflated in a crash.

• The glove compartment must be

closed while travelling. An open glove

compartment door could cause leg

injuries in the event of a crash.

•Never place anything on the dash or in

front of the seat as, in addition to being

a hazard to passengers, this could

interfere with the function of the airbag

in the event of a crash. The same

applies to the mounting of accessories

on the dash.

• Keep feet on the floor – never put feet

up on the fascia, on the seat or out of

the window.

• Do not carry anything in your lap.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 32 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

33Safety

Passenger Sensing System

Vehicles with a passenger sensing system

have indicator LEDs on the fascia. The indi-

cators will be lit during the system check

when you turn your ignition key to ST or ON.

When the system check is complete, either

the ON or the OFF LED, will be lit. See

AIRBAG warning light on page 61.

The passenger sensing system will turn off

the right front passenger’s frontal airbag

and side airbag under certain conditions.

The driver’s airbags is not part of the pas-

senger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works with

sensors that are part of the right front pas-

senger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors

are designed to detect the presence of a

properly-seated occupant and determine if

the passenger’s frontal airbag should be

enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are

safer if they are restrained in the rear rather

than the front seat.

Saab recommends that child restraints be

secured in a rear seat, including an infant

riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child

riding in a forward-facing child seat and an

older child riding in a booster seat.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accom-

modate a rear-facing child restraint. A label

on your sun visor says, “Never put a

rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is

because the risk to the rear-facing child is so

great, if the airbag deploys.

IB3952

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator.

USA

IB3953

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator,

Canada

95_U S_M 07.book Page 33 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

34 Safety

The passenger sensing system is designed

to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal

airbag if:

• the right front passenger seat is unoccu-

pied

• the system determines that an infant is

present in a rear-facing infant seat

• the system determines that a small child

is present in a forward-facing child

restraint

• the system determines that a small child

is present in a booster seat

• a right front passenger takes his/her

weight off of the seat for a period of time

• the right front passenger seat is occupied

by a smaller person, such as a child who

has outgrown child restraints

• or if there is a critical problem with the

airbag system or the passenger sensing

system.

When the passenger sensing system has

turned off the passenger’s frontal air bag,

the off indicator will light and stay lit to

remind you that the airbag is off.

If a child restraint has been installed (Saab

recommends that child restraints be

secured in the rear seat) and the on indica-

tor is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the

child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall

the child restraint following the child

restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer

to Installation of rear facing child restraints

on page 28.

If after reinstalling the child restraint and

restarting the vehicle, the on indicator is still

lit, check to make sure that the vehicle’s

seatback is not pressing the child restraint

into the seat cushion. If this happens,

slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and

adjust the seat cushion if possible. Also

make sure the child restraint is not trapped

under the vehicle head restraint. If this hap-

pens, adjust the head restraint.

WARNING

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can

be seriously injured or killed if the right

front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is

because the back of the rear-facing child

restraint would be very close to the inflat-

ing airbag.

Even though the passenger sensing

system is designed to turn off the passen-

ger’s frontal airbag if the system detects a

rear-facing child restraint, no system is

fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that

an airbag will not deploy under some

unusual circumstance, even though it is

turned off. Saab recommends that

rear-facing child restraints be secured in

the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 34 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

35Safety

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child

in the child restraint in a rear seat position in

the vehicle and check with your dealer.

The passenger sensing system is designed

to enable (may inflate) the right front pas-

senger’s frontal airbag anytime the system

senses that a person of adult size is sitting

properly in the right front passenger’s seat.

When the passenger sensing system has

allowed the airbag to be enabled, the on

indicator will light and stay lit to remind you

that the airbag is active.

For some children who have outgrown child

restraints and for very small adults, the pas-

senger sensing system may or may not turn

off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag,

depending upon the person’s seating pos-

ture and body build. Everyone in your vehi-

cle who has outgrown child restraints

should wear a safety belt properly —

whether or not there is an airbag for that per-

son.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right

front passenger’s seat, but the off indicator

is lit, it could be because that person is not

sitting properly in the seat. If this happens,

turn the vehicle off and ask the person to

place the seatback in the fully upright posi-

tion, then sit upright in the seat, centered on

the seat cushion, with the person’s legs

comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle

and have the person remain in this position

for about two minutes. This will allow the

system to detect that person and then

enable the passenger’s airbag.

Aftermarket equipment, such as seat cov-

ers, can affect how well the passenger

sensing system operates. You may want to

consider not using seat covers or other

aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has

the passenger sensing system. See Adding

Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehi-

cle on page 41 for more information about

modifications that can affect how the

system operates.

WARNING

If the airbag readiness light in the instru-

ment panel cluster ever comes on and

stays on, it means that something may be

wrong with the airbag system. If this ever

happens, have the vehicle serviced

promptly, because an adult-size person

sitting in the right front passenger’s seat

may not have the protection of the frontal

airbag. See Airbag warning light on page

61 for more on this, including important

safety information.

WARNING

Stowing of articles under the passenger’s

seat or between the passenger’s seat

cushion and seatback may interfere with

the proper operation of the passenger

sensing system.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 35 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

36 Safety

Side airbags The side airbags, which help protect the

upper body are integrated in the outside

edges of the front seat backrests.

In a side impact, only the airbag on that side

will be activated, and only then if certain pre-

determined conditions are met such as the

force and angle of the impact, the speed of

the car on impact, and at which point on the

car’s side the impact occurs.

The sensors, which are fitted in the front

doors, sense the rise in pressure caused by

the door panel being pressed in during an

impact condition. The side airbag trigger will

be commanded based on the characteris-

tics of this pressure rise.

WARNING

• This car is equipped with side airbags

and no extra interior trim should be fit-

ted. Failure to observe this warning

could result in the side airbags not

inflating as intended and thus not pro-

viding the intended protection either.

• Never place any object in the area that

would be occupied by the inflated air-

bag.

• For optimum protection, sit upright in

the seat, with your safety belt correctly

fastened.

• The sensors for the side airbags are

fitted in the front doors. We advise

against doing any work on the doors

that could affect the moisture barrier in

the door or the airbag sensors. It is

essential that the moisture barrier

(thick plastic film) in the front door is

not damaged in any way.

• Improvement of the anticorrosion

treatment of the doors should only be

carried out by a workshop. We recom-

mend that you contact an authorized

Saab dealer. Otherwise there is a risk

that the side impact sensor and the

moisture barrier in the front door could

be damaged.

• The side airbags will inflate only in the

event of a side impact; not in the event

of a front or rear-end crash or of the

car’s rolling over.

• Damage or wear to the seat cover, or

the seat seam, in the area of the side

airbag must immediately be repaired.

We recommend that you contact an

authorized Saab dealer.

• Do not modify the speaker installation

in the front doors or install speakers

other than those specifically approved

by Saab.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 36 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

37Safety

AIRBAG warning light

WARNING

• If the airbag readiness light stays on

after you start your vehicle, it means

the airbag system may not be working

properly. See page 61. The airbags in

your vehicle may not inflate in a crash,

or they could even inflate without a

crash.

• To help avoid injury to yourself or oth-

ers, have your vehicle serviced right

away if the airbag readiness light stays

on after you start your vehicle.

IB1182

Side airbag inflated

IB1707

Side airbag components

1 Side airbag

2 Sensor

3 Moisture barrier

4 Text on seat

95_U S_M 07.book Page 37 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

38 Safety

What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates?

After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates,

so quickly that some people may not even

realize the airbag inflated. Some compo-

nents of the airbag module - the steering

wheel hub for the driver's frontal airbag, the

instrument panel for the right front passen-

ger's frontal airbag or the ceiling of your

vehicle near the side windows - will be hot

for a short time. The parts of the bag that

come into contact with you may be warm,

but not too hot to touch. There will be some

smoke and dust coming from the vents in

the deflated airbags. airbag inflation does

not prevent the driver from seeing or being

able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop

people from leaving the vehicle. In many crashes severe enough to inflate an

airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle

deformation. Additional windshield break-

age may also occur from the right front pas-

senger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.

After an airbag inflates, you will need

some new parts for your airbag system. If

you do not get them, the airbag system

will not be there to help protect you in

another crash. A new system will include

airbag modules and possibly other parts.

The service manual for your vehicle

covers the need to replace other parts.

• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash

sensing and diagnostic module which

records information after a crash. See

Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data

Recorders on page 255.

• Let only qualified technicians work on

your airbag system. Improper service can

mean that your airbag system will not

work properly. See your dealer for ser-

vice.

WARNING

When an airbag inflates, there is dust in

the air. This dust could cause breathing

problems for people with a history of

asthma or other breathing trouble. To

avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should

get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you

have breathing problems but cannot get

out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates,

then get fresh air by opening a window or

a door. If you experience breathing prob-

lems following an airbag deployment, you

should seek medical attention.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 38 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

39Safety

AIRBAG servicing

The airbag must be inspected as part of the

normal service program but otherwise may

be regarded as maintenance-free.

Scrapping or working on airbags

and belt pretensioners

WARNING

If you damage the covering for the driver's

or the right front passenger's airbag, or

the side impact airbag covering on the

ceiling near the side windows, the bag

may not work properly. You may have to

replace the airbag module in the steering

wheel, both the airbag module and the

instrument panel for the right front pas-

senger's airbag, or side impact airbag

module and ceiling covering for the

roof-mounted side impact airbag. Do not

open or break the airbag coverings.

WARNING

• Under no circumstances should any

modifications be made that affect the

steering wheel or the airbag’s electri-

cal circuitry.

• Before starting any welding work on

the car, always disconnect the nega-

tive (–) battery lead and cover the con-

ductor.

• Airbags and belt pretensioners must

be deployed under controlled condi-

tions before the car is scrapped or any

of the system’s components are

removed. Airbags or belt pretension-

ers that have been deployed as a

result of a crash must be replaced by

new ones.

• Airbag-system components must

never be transferred for use in another

vehicle.

• All work involving the scrapping or

replacement of airbags or belt preten-

sioners must only be carried out by

knowledgeable personnel.

• The headlining and roof pillar trim

must not be modified in any way. Work

on these areas must only be carried

out at a Saab dealer.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 39 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

40 Safety

Frequently asked questions on

function of airbags

Do you still need to wear a

safety b

elt if air-

bags are fitted?

Yes, always! The airbag merely supple-

ments the car’s normal safety system.

Moreover, the airbag will only be actuated in

a moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal

crash, which means, of course, that it pro-

vides no protection in minor frontal crashes,

major rear-end or side-on crashes or if the

car rolls over.

The safety belts help reduce the chance of

the car occupants from being thrown around

and injured or killed inside the car.

But they also ensure that, if a crash occurs

in which the airbags are inflated, the airbag

will make the optimum contact with the

occupant, i.e. square on from the front. If the

occupant meets the airbag in an offset posi-

tion, the protection afforded will be reduced.

In addition, airbags provide no protection

against a secondary impact occurring in the

same incident. So there is no doubt about

the benefit of wearing safety belts at all

times.

Do not sit too close to the airbag: it needs

room to inflate.

The airbag inflates very quickly and power-

fully in order to protect an adult person,

before they are thrown forward, in a serious

frontal crash.

How do I position the seat to leave room for

the airbag to inflate?

Don’t have your seat too far forward.

Recline the seat back to increase the dis-

tance between you and the airbag. For short

drivers, special accessory pedal extensions

are available through your Saab dealer.

Airbags inflate extremely rapidly and with

great force – to be fast enough to protect an

adult in the seat.

When do the front airbags inflate?

The airbag will only be inflated under certain

predetermined conditions in a moderate to

severe frontal, or near-frontal crash,

depending on such factors as the force and

angle of the impact, the speed of the car on

impact, and the resistance to deformation of

the impacting object.

The airbag can only be activated once in the

same incident.

Do not attempt to drive the car after an

airbag has been inflated, even if it is

possible.

What won’t trigger the front airbags?

The airbag will not be activated in all

front-end crashes. For instance, if the car

has hit something relatively soft and yielding

(e.g. a snow drift or a hedge) or a solid

object at a low impact speed, the airbag will

not necessarily be triggered.

How loud is the inflation?

The noise of the inflation is certainly loud,

but it is very short-lived and will not damage

your hearing. For a short time afterwards

you could experience a buzzing noise in

your ears.

Most people who have experienced it

cannot remember the noise of the inflation

at all – all they remember is the noise of the

crash.

Can you still use a child seat in the front if a

passenger airbag is installed?

Definitely not!

• Children 12 and under or shorter than

55 inches (140 cm) can be killed by the

airbag.

• The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place for

children.

• NEVER put a child seat in the front.

• Sit as far back as possible from the air-

bag.

• Always use safety belts and child

restraints.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 40 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

41Safety

Are the smoke and fumes given off when the

airbag operates at all harmful?

Most people who have remained in a car

with little or no ventilation for several min-

utes complained only of minor irritation of

the throat and eyes. Avoid as far as possible

getting dust on your skin as there is a risk of

skin irritation.

If you suffer from asthma, the incident may

bring on an attack, in which case you should

follow the normal procedure advised by

your doctor. It is advisable to consult a

doctor afterwards.

What should I do if the AIRBAG warning

light comes on?

If the warning light is on, it means that a fault

has been detected in the system. The

airbag cannot be relied on to operate as

intended and it might even be activated

erroneously. You should therefore take the

car to an authorized Saab dealer as soon as

possible.

Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle

Is there anything I might add to the front or

sides of the vehicle that could keep the air-

bags from working properly?

Yes. If you add things that change your vehi-

cle’s frame, bumper system, front end or

side sheet metal or height, they may keep

the airbag system from working properly.

Also, the airbag system may not work prop-

erly if you relocate any of the airbag sen-

sors. If you have any questions about this,

you should contact Saab Customer Assis-

tance before you modify your vehicle.

The phone numbers and addresses for

Customer Assistance can be found on

page 253.

Because I have a disability, I have to get my

vehicle modified. How can I find out whether

this will affect my advanced airbag system?

Changing or moving any parts of the front

seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and

diagnostic module or the inside rearview

mirror can affect the operation of the

advanced airbag system. If you have ques-

tions, call Customer Assistance. The phone

numbers and addresses for Customer

Assistance can be found on page 253.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 41 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

42 Safety

(This page has been left empty.)

95_U S_M 07.book Page 42 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

43Security

Doors _______________ 44

Central locking _______ 44

Car alarm ____________ 50

IB4116

Security

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,

market specification, options or accessories).

95_U S_M 07.book Page 43 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

44 Security

Doors

Door handles

Pull the handle to open the door.

If the door is stuck (e.g. if frozen), hold the

handle from above to secure a better grip.

Central locking

Key / Remote control

The key unit consists of a mechanical key

with integrated remote control.

The mechanical key is used for manual

locking and unlocking.

The remote control is used for remote lock-

ing and unlocking.

The key fits all the car’s locks.

The key supplied with the car has a code

number on a black plastic tag that needs to

be quoted for ordering additional keys. You

should therefore make a careful note of the

number.

The key contains a unique electronic code

for your car. When the key is inserted in the

ignition, the code is checked. If it matches,

the car can be started.

Your car is supplied with two keys. It is pos-

sible to have up to four keys for a car at one

time. If you loose one key you should have

this replaced as soon as possible by con-

tacting your Saab dealer. When the new key

is programmed into the system, the missing

key is automatically erased.

NOTE: For this reason, we strongly advise

you to take two keys with you on long jour-

neys and to keep them separate. If all keys

are lost, it will be necessary to replace costly

electronic components as well as the keys.

This loss and replacement cost is not cov-

ered by the new car warranty.

If an additional key is to be added, all of the

original keys must be brought to the dealer

so that the control module can ”learn” to rec-

ognize the new components.

To check the number of keys that are pro-

grammed for the car; see page 54.

WARNING

Leaving children or pets unattended in a

locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-

ous to leave children in a vehicle with the

ignition key. A child or others could be

badly injured or even killed.

NOTICE

The key contains delicate electronics.

• Do not expose it to water.

• Avoid rough handling.

• Do not place the key where it may be

subjected to high temperatures, e.g.

on the instrument panel.

• The key may malfunction if it becomes

very cold. Warm it in your hands for a

couple of minutes.

• Never open the key. For changing the

battery, see page 49.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 44 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

45Security

Locking/unlocking the car

When the car is locked and unlocked the

theft alarm is also affected.

Remote locking

Press once on the control: all doors

locked.

The hazard warning lights will flash once.

The trunk/tailgate release switch on the

driver´s door will not work when all doors are

locked.

It is now not possible to unlock the doors

from within using the button on the

center console.

Remote unlocking

Press once on the control: the driver´s

door is unlocked. Press a second time to

unlock the rest of the doors but not the

trunk/tailgate.

The hazard warning lights will flash twice.

The central locking can also be operated

from inside the car by means of the

switch on the center console.

This switch is inoperative when the car is

locked from the outside using the remote

control.

The interior locking buttons on each door

affect only the respective door.

If the car is left with the doors open, the inte-

rior lighting and the courtesy lights in the

doors will be switched off automatically after

20 minutes, to prevent a drain on the bat-

tery. In such cases the electrically operated

seats will not function.

IB3153

3 2

Key / Remote control

1To lock

2 To unlock

3 Opening the trunk (9-5 Sedan)

Unlocking the tailgate (9-5 SportCombi)

IB451

Switch for operation of central locking

95_U S_M 07.book Page 45 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

46 Security

If remote unlocking should fail to work

Unlock the front door with the key. To

silence the alarm, insert the key into the igni-

tion switch and turn it to the ON position.

The car can now be started. Contact a work-

shop to have the system checked and

repaired. We recommend that you contact

an authorized Saab dealer.

Locking by key (1)

When the car is locked and unlocked the

theft alarm is also affected.

Turn the key clockwise: all doors locked.

The trunk/tailgate release/unlock switch on

the driver’s door will not work when all doors

are locked. Nor will the switch on the center

console.

Unlocking by key (2)

Turn the key counterclockwise once: the

driver´s door will unlock.

Turn the key counterclockwise twice: all

doors, but not tailgate, unlocked. Switch in

driver´s door and switch in center console

enabled.

WARNING

The remote control also works from inside

the car. Therefore, hold the key in such a

way that the buttons are not unintention-

ally pressed when the key is turned, or

inserted or removed from the ignition

switch.

Otherwise, the doors may be unintention-

ally locked or the tailgate unlocked. On

Sedan models, the trunk may even be

opened.

Having the doors locked when you are

driving will reduce the likelihood of:

• Passengers, especially children,

opening doors and falling out of the

car.

• Intruders entering the car when it is

moving slowly or at a standstill.

However, you must also remember that

locked doors can hamper rescuers in the

event of a crash.

IB1555

Locking/unlocking by key

1To lock

2 To unlock

95_U S_M 07.book Page 46 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

47Security

Child safety locks

The rear doors are equipped with child

safety locks that are operated by means of

a catch adjacent to the door lock.

Insert a key and turn the catch 45° clockwise

or counterclockwise as indicated by the

label on the door.

When the child safety catch is in the locked

position, the door cannot be opened from

the inside.

Trunk lid lock, 9-5 Sedan

The trunk lid lock is independent of the cen-

tral-locking system. The trunk lid release

switch on the driver’s door is inoperative

when the car is locked from the outside or

moving at a speed greater than 2.7 mph

(4 km/h).

WARNING

If small children ride in the rear seats, the

safety locks on rear doors should be acti-

vated to prevent unintentional opening

from the inside.

IB1871

Child safety lock on rear doors Trunk lid switch

95_U S_M 07.book Page 47 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

48 Security

Unlocking

The trunk lid is slightly opened/unlocked

using:

• The button on the key

• The trunk lid switch on the inside of the

driver’s door (if the car is unlocked and at

a standstill)

Remote unlocking is confirmed by the direc-

tion indicators flashing three times.

The trunk lid switch on the driver’s door is

inoperative when the car is locked.

Locking

The trunk lid release is locked automatically

when closed.

Trunk Release Handle

There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release

handle located inside the trunk on the latch.

This handle will glow following exposure to

light. Pull the release handle down to open

the trunk from the inside.

Tailgate, 9-5 SportCombi

The tailgate is not unlocked when the other

car doors are unlocked. The tailgate button

on the driver’s door is inoperative when the

car is locked from outside or moving at a

speed greater than 2.7 mph (4 km/h).

Unlocking

The tailgate is unlocked using:

• The button on the key

• The tailgate switch on the inside of the

driver’s door (if the car is unlocked and at

a standstill)

Unlocking is confirmed by the direction indi-

cators flashing three times.

NOTICE

The trunk release handle was not

designed to be used to tie down the trunk

lid or as a an anchor point when securing

items in the trunk. Improper use of the

trunk release could damage it.

IB1833

Trunk Release Handle

95_U S_M 07.book Page 48 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

49Security

Locking

The tailgate is locked using:

• The button on the key

• The button on the center console

• The key in the driver’s door.

• When vehicle speed exceeds 2.7 mph

(4 km/h).

Electronic starting interlock

(immobilizer)

Each time the key is removed from the igni-

tion, the electronic starting interlock is acti-

vated and the car is thus immobilized, see

also page 51.

Reprogramming lock system

functions

Certain lock system functions can be repro-

grammed by your authorized Saab dealer;

see page 270.

Changing the key battery

When the battery voltage in the key falls

below a predetermined level the Saab Infor-

mation Display (SID) will issue the following

message:

”Remote control battery

low. Replace battery.”

Press the CLR button on the SID to

acknowledge this message. You must then

replace the battery without delay to avoid

malfunctions. The life of the battery is nor-

mally 4 years.Contact a Saab dealer to

have the battery replaced.

NOTICE

Use the grab handle to assist in closing

the tailgate.

Avoid the following, due to the risk of lock

mechanism damage when the tailgate is

closed.

• Never grasp the lock mechanism as

this can lock the mechanism.

• Never close the lock mechanism

manually.

IB3160

Grab handle

95_U S_M 07.book Page 49 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

50 Security

Car alarm

The car alarm (anti-theft system) is acti-

vated/deactivated when the car is

locked/unlocked by the remote control or by

the key, see page 45.

The antenna for the alarm system is located

in the center console.

All the doors plus trunk lid/tailgate and hood

are monitored by microswitches.

Your Saab 9-5 is equipped with an Elec-

tronic starting interlock (immobilizer), see

page 51 for details.

The car alarm is armed 10 seconds after the

car has been locked by the remote control.

During this ten-second delay period, the

doors, trunk lid/tailgate and hood may still

be opened without the alarm being trig-

gered.

The LED indicator on the instrument panel

fascia will be on continuously during this

period, at the end of which it will start to flash

(once every other second).

If a door or the trunk lid/tailgate or hood has

been left open when the car is locked, the

LED on the fascia will flash (three times per

second) for ten seconds to indicate this.

WARNING

Leaving children or pets unattended in a

locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-

ous to leave children in a vehicle with the

ignition key. A child or others could be

badly injured or even killed.

IB3153

3 2

Remote control

1 Activate/lock

2 Deactivate/unlock

3 Unlock trunk/tailgate

Unlocking the tailgate (9-5 SportCombi)

95_U S_M 07.book Page 50 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

51Security

Check to ensure that all the doors, plus

trunk lid/tailgate and hood, are closed prop-

erly.

If the fault persists (LED flashing when

another attempt is made to activate the car

alarm by remote control), lock the car using

the key instead. The car alarm will not have

been activated and you should contact an

authorized Saab dealer.

To avoid inconvenience caused by the

alarm being triggered inadvertently, make

sure that anyone else using the car is famil-

iar with how both the car alarm and the lock-

ing system work.

If the alarm is tripped (the direction indica-

tors are flashing and the horn is on) it can be

turned off by unlocking the car using the

button.

Activating the car alarm

The car alarm cannot be activated if the

driver’s door is open or if the ignition switch

is in ON position.

If one of the other doors or the trunk or hood

is open or opened and not closed again

during the 10-second delay period, it will be

excluded from the alarm function.

If it is then closed, a new delay period of ten

seconds will start, and the door (or trunk or

hood) will once again be secured by the

alarm system.

As usual, the LED will be on continuously

during the new delay period and will start to

flash once every other second after the

10-second period has elapsed.

Electronic starting interlock

(immobilizer)

When the key is inserted in the ignition, a

signal is sent to the receiver. If the signal is

verified, the engine can be started.

Each time the key is removed from the igni-

tion, the electronic immobilizer is activated.

This means that the car cannot be started

without the correct key inserted in the igni-

tion and the immobilizer thus deactivated.

If a fault is detected (e.g. in the transmitter)

”Key not accepted.

Contact service.”

will appear on the Saab Information Display

(SID).

In this case, you can still start the car if you

turn the ignition key to ON and press one of

the buttons on the key (providing that the

receiver gets the right signal from the key).

Take the car to an authorized Saab dealer

to have the system checked.

The LED double-flashes when the car is

immobilized.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 51 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

52 Security

Alarm signals

When the car alarm is armed, it will be trig-

gered if any door, or the trunk lid or hood, is

opened.

The alarm will also be triggered if an attempt

is made to bypass or short-circuit the igni-

tion switch, or to disconnect the battery.

If the alarm is triggered, the following alarm

signals will be set off:

• Flashing of hazard warning lights for five

minutes.

• Horn wailing for 30 seconds.

The alarm signals will stop if the alarm is

deactivated (car unlocked) during the alarm

period.

Panic-function

In the car alarm system there is a feature

called "Panic-function".

To activate panic function:

• Push and hold one of the buttons on the

key for 2 seconds. Or, if you are sitting

inside the car, push the LOCK-switch on

the center console for 2 seconds.

These actions will trigger the alarm (hazard

warning lights and horn).

To deactivate panic function:

• Push one of the buttons on the key, push

the LOCK-switch in the center console,

turn the key in the driver´s door or turn the

ignition to ON.

When the panic-function is activated the car

will be locked/unlocked depending upon

which button was pushed.

When the ignition is ON the panic-function

cannot be activated.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 52 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

53Security

Overview of functions

Alarm signals may differ between model variants for different

countries.

Some of the car-alarm functions can be reprogrammed – con-

sult your Saab dealer for further details (see page 270).

Locking/

activation

Hazard warning lights flash once.

The LED will come on for 10 seconds.

Unlocking/

deactivation

Hazard warning lights flash twice.

The LED will come on for two seconds.

Unlocking/

deactivation of

trunk lid/tailgate

alarm

Hazard warning lights flash three times.

The LED will flash three times per second for

10 seconds.

Alarm triggered Hazard warning lights flash for 5 min.

Horn wails for 30 seconds.

To switch off the alarm, deactivate the system in

the normal way (unlocking).

Key The range of the key is normally 5–10 yds. (5–

10 metres), although it can be substantially more

than this in ideal conditions (range can vary

greatly depending on the position of the car and

its surroundings).

If the key is not working, it may be because the

code signal has not been synchronized with that

in the control module for the car alarm. To rectify

this, press the unlock button on the key at least

four times in quick succession. When it is recog-

nized, the door locks will cycle.

If a key is lost, the new one will have to be pro-

grammed (all keys must be present) to match the

car’s unique security code. We recommend that

you contact an authorized Saab dealer.

Battery for key The battery for the key will normally have a life of

4 years. When the battery needs changing,

”Remote control battery

low. Replace battery.”

will appear on the Saab Information Display

(SID).

We recommend that you contact an authorized

Saab dealer.

Car-battery

voltage

If the battery is disconnected while the alarm is

active (car is locked), for example during an

attempt to steal the car, the alarm will be

triggered.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 53 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

54 Security

Overview of LED signals and SID messages

Some signals may differ between model variants for different

countries.

Status LED signal

Activation (during 10-second delay). Comes on for 10 seconds.

Alarm activated (after delay). Flashes once every other

second.

Deactivation. Comes on for 2 seconds.

Alarm not activated. Off.

Door, trunk lid/tailgate or hood open

or opened during delay period.

Flashes three times per sec-

ond for 10 seconds.

Unlocking the trunk lid/tailgate. Flashes three times per sec-

ond for 10 seconds.

Closing of door, trunk lid/tailgate or

hood after delay period.

Comes on for 10 seconds.

Car immobilized but not locked.

Car alarm not activated.

Flashes twice at three sec-

onds intervals.

Fault in a switch serving doors, hood

or trunk lid.

Flashing (instead of being

on continuously) during

delay period.

SID message Reason/action

Theft protection failure.

Contact service.

Probably a fault in one of the sensors

or the horn.

Have the car checked by a workshop.

We recommend that you contact an

authorized Saab dealer.

Key not accepted.

Contact service.

Fault in key transmitter or in igni-

tion-switch receiver.

Turn ignition switch to ON and press

the unlock button on the key. Start

the engine.

Have the car checked by a workshop.

We recommend that you contact an

authorized Saab dealer.

Remote control battery

low. Replace battery.

Fit a new battery in the key. We rec-

ommend that you contact an autho-

rized Saab dealer.

• REMOTE KEY

• TRANSPONDR

Turn the ignition key to position ON

and then press the button for open-

ing the trunk lid. Saab Information

Display (SID) displays the number of

keys and transmitters (transponders)

coded to the car.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 54 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

55Security

Canada only:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not

cause harmful interference, and (2) must accept any interference

received, including interference that may cause undesired oper-

ation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manu-

facturer could void the user´s authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Opera-

tion is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may

not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any inter-

ference, including interference that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 55 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

56 Security

(This page has been left blank)

95_U S_M 07.book Page 56 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

57Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning

lights ______________ 58

Instruments __________ 64

Saab Information Display

(SID) _______________ 68

Switches ____________ 73

Automatic climate control

(ACC) ______________ 79

IB4527

Instruments and controls

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,

market specification, options or accessories).

95_U S_M 07.book Page 57 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

58 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning

lights

A number of indicator and warning lights will

come on when the ignition is switched on

prior to starting. Under normal conditions,

these should go out a few seconds after the

engine has started (see page 64).

Engine malfunction

(CHECK ENGINE)

WARNING

An illuminated ”Engine malfunction

(CHECK ENGINE)” indicator light indi-

cates an engine-related problem. While

your car may be able to be driven with the

”Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)”

indicator light illuminated (Limp-home

mode), you are advised to have your car

serviced at an authorized Saab dealer as

soon as possible.

Continued driving without this problem

being corrected might cause serious fur-

ther damage to your car and create

unsafe driving conditions. The driver

should be prepared to take action if such

unsafe conditions arise (e.g.brake

smoothly, engage neutral, stop in a suita-

ble place, switch off the engine, etc.).

Main instrument panel

1 Tachometer

2 Indicator and warning lights

3 Speedometer

4 Indicator and warning lights

5 Pressure gauge 3

6 Fuel gauge

7 Engine temperature gauge

8 Odometer and trip meter

9 Trip meter reset button

IB4117

U.S. shown, Canada similar

95_U S_M 07.book Page 58 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

59Instruments and controls

This light indicates a malfunction in the

fuel-injection or ignition system. The car

may still be driven with care and with some-

what diminished performance (see

page 144).

This light will come on if the engine oil pres-

sure is dangerously low. If the light flashes

or comes on while you are driving, stop the

car, switch off the engine and check the

engine oil level (see page 194).

This light will come on if the battery is dis-

charging. If it comes on while you are driv-

ing, stop the car as soon as possible and

switch off the engine.

Check the alternator drive belt (see page

201). If the belt has broken:

• the engine may overheat (cooling system

will not function properly)

• the battery will not be charged

• the A/C compressor will not run and

• power assistance for the steering will be

lost.

This light will come on if there is insufficient

brake fluid in the reservoir (see pages 196).

If the ABS warning light is on at the same

time, the ABS system may be inoperative

because of a fault (see ”Anti-lock brake

warning”, page 60).

NOTICE

The car should be checked immediately

at a workshop to prevent more serious

faults from arising. We recommend that

you contact an authorized Saab dealer.

Warning, oil pressure

(engine oil)

NOTICE

Under no circumstances must the car be

driven when this warning light is on. Low

oil pressure can result in serious engine

damage.

Warning, charging Brake warning light

WARNING

• Never drive the car when this warning

lights is on. Danger of brake failure!

• If the level of brake fluid in the reser-

voir is below the MIN mark, the car

should be towed to a workshop. We

recommend that you contact an

authorized Saab workshop.

• Have the brake system checked at

once by a workshop. We recommend

that you contact an authorized Saab

dealer.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 59 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

60 Instruments and controls

This light will show when the parking brake

is on (see page 165).

The parking brake is mechanical and oper-

ates on the rear wheels.

This light will come on if a fault has occurred

in the ABS system.

On certain variants and can light

up to indicate a fault in the electronic brake

force distribution system (distribution of the

brake pressure between the front and rear

wheels).

Conventional braking without the ABS func-

tion will still be available.

For safety reasons, stop the car and check

the level of the brake fluid (see page 196).

If the level is normal, depress the brake

pedal firmly two or three times. Now check

the level again. If the level is still normal, you

may drive the car, with considerable cau-

tion, to the nearest authorized Saab dealer

to have the brake system checked.

This light indicates that the headlights or the

parking lights are on.

Parking brake warning

light

WARNING

•Always apply the parking brake when

parking, see page 165.

•Always apply the parking brake

before removing the ignition key.

•Do not apply the parking brake while

the car is moving.

Anti-lock brake warning WARNING

• If the ABS is inoperative, there is a

danger of the rear wheels locking up

on hard braking.

• If the level of brake fluid in the reser-

voir is below the MIN mark, the car

should be towed to an authorized

Saab dealer.

Headlight and parking

light indicator

95_U S_M 07.book Page 60 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

61Instruments and controls

This light will come on if a potentially serious

fault has occurred in the airbag system.

The light will come on for about three sec-

onds when the ignition switch is turned to

the Start or Drive position. It should go out

after the engine has started.

This light comes on when there is less than

about 2.5 gallons (10 liters) of fuel left in the

tank.

This light indicates that there is a fault in the

Xenon headlight system, which consists of

xenon headlights and an automatic levelling

system.

If a fault arises in the Xenon headlight sys-

tem, the headlights will be angled down to

avoid impairing the vision of drivers in

oncoming traffic. Adjust your speed accord-

ingly as visibility will be reduced.

Airbag warning light

WARNING

• If the airbag readiness light stays on

after you start your vehicle, it means

the airbag system may not be working

properly.

• To help avoid injury to yourself or

others, have your vehicle serviced

right away if the airbag readiness light

stays on after you start your vehicle.

Indicator, fuel

NOTICE

If the car runs out of fuel, air can be drawn

in with the fuel, which, in turn, can cause

the catalytic converter to be damaged by

overheating.

Xenon headlight fault

indicator 3

NOTICE

If the Xenon headlight fault indicator lights

up, have your car checked as soon as

possible a workshop. We recommend

that you contact an authorized Saab

dealer.

If you do not rectify the problem, nighttime

visibility will be poor since the range of the

headlights is reduced.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 61 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

62 Instruments and controls

This light shows when the cruise-control

system is active (see page 159).

This light shows when the headlights are on

high beam (see page 73).

This light shows when the rear fog light is on

(see page 74).

The rear fog light is switched off automat-

ically when the engine is switched off. When

the fog light is next needed, it will have to be

switched on manually again.

The rear fog light consists of one light so it

should not be mistaken for brake lights.

If a door has not been closed properly, the

pictogram will indicate the door concerned

(or tailgate).

This light will come on in cars with automatic

transmission when the S (SPORT) button

on the selector lever has been pressed

(position N or D) see page 158.

In this mode, the gear changes occur later,

at higher engine revs, giving the engine and

transmission a sportier feel.

To cancel the SPORT mode, press the S

button on the selector lever again. The

mode is also deselected automatically

when the selector lever is moved to P, R, M

or L, or when the ignition is switched off.

On a car with an automatic transmission,

this warning symbol is illuminated if a fault

has been detected in the transmission.

Switch the ignition off and on again to check

if the fault persists.

Even if the fault persists, it is still possible in

most cases to drive the car (see page 154).

Have the automatic transmission checked

by an authorized Saab dealer as soon as

possible.

Indicator, cruise control

Indicator, high beam

Indicator, rear fog light

Indicator, open door

Indicator, SPORT-mode

automatic transmission 3

Automatic transmission 3,

fault indicator

NOTICE

If the control module has actuated the

Limp-home function for the automatic

transmission, the car will remain in 5th

gear when D is selected, making it very

sluggish. To overcome this, select posi-

tion L to prevent unnecessary wear on the

transmission. The transmission then

starts in 2nd gear. When the car is moving

you can select position D.

When the indicator light is on, the car

must not be driven with a trailer attached.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 62 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

63Instruments and controls

The ESP®

indicator light is located in the

tachometer and will be illuminated when the

ESP® regulation is occurring, i.e. when

there is insufficient traction between the

tires and the road surface to provide the grip

required for the acceleration called for. The

driver can also sense that the engine is not

responding normally to the accelerator.

Operation of the ESP® indicates reduced

traction between the tires and the road, and

that extra care should be taken by the driver.

In normal driving, the ESP® system will help

to improve both ride comfort and safety, but

must not be regarded as a system to enable

the driver to drive at or maintain a higher

rate of speed. The same precautions for

safe cornering and driving on slippery roads

must still be applied (see page 163).

The indicator light goes on when the system

is switched off with the ESP® button.

IMPORTANT: the system is automatically

engaged every time the engine is started

(see page 163).

The indicator light also goes on when there

is a fault in the system. In this case the light

cannot be turned off by means of the ESP®

button. If a fault is indicated, have the

system checked by an authorized Saab

dealer.

See also Electronic Stability Program

(ESP®) on page 163.

ESP® system, indicator

ESP® system, OFF-indica-

tor

95_U S_M 07.book Page 63 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

64 Instruments and controls

Autochecking of lights,

main instrument panel

The above warning and indicator lights

should come on when the ignition is

switched on prior to starting. They should go

out after about 3 seconds.

The following lights light up until the engine

is started, presuming that no fault exists:

• Oil pressure warning light .

• Warning, charging .

Instruments

Tachometer

The tachometer indicates the engine speed

in thousands of revolutions per minute. The

needle may be allowed to enter the broken

red zone on the dial only for an instant.

A safety cut-out function (in the fuel system)

prevents the engine speed from exceeding

approximately 6,000 rpm.

Odometer and trip meter

The odometer records the distance traveled

in miles on U.S. vehicles and on Canadian

vehicles the distance indicated is in kilome-

tres, and the trip meter in miles and tenths

(kilometres and tenths of kilometres on

Canadian vehicles).

Reset button

The reset button has two functions, deter-

mined by whether the ignition is ON or OFF.

• When the ignition is ON, pressing the

button will reset the trip meter.

• When the ignition is OFF, the display

lights up enabling you to read the odome-

ter and trip meter. Pressing the button a

second time will reset the trip meter.

IB4468

1 Cars with automatic transmission

IB3847

IB4157

95_U S_M 07.book Page 64 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

65Instruments and controls

Speedometer

(U.S. speedometer shown)

The speedometer receives signals from the

wheel sensors in the ABS system.

Cars sold in U.S.: The speedometer dis-

plays the speed of the car in miles per hour

(mph).

Cars sold in Canada: The speedometer dis-

plays the speed of the car in kilometres per

hour (km/h).

Fuel gauge

Fuel-tank capacity, 18.5 US gal. (70 liters).

The fuel gauge shows the amount of fuel left

in the tank. When this is down to about

2.5 gal. (10 liters), a warning light on the

main instrument panel will come on (see

page 61).

Use the Saab Information display (SID) to

check the approximate distance that can be

traveled on the remaining fuel

(see page 68).

Temperature gauge

The temperature gauge shows the temper-

ature of the coolant. The needle should be

in the middle of the scale when the engine

is at normal operating temperature.

If the needle approaches the red zone,

which can occur in very hot weather or when

the engine is under a heavy load, drive in the

highest gear possible, keep the engine revs

low and avoid shifting down.

IB4120

IB3850

IB3851

95_U S_M 07.book Page 65 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

66 Instruments and controls

Check fuse 1 (radiator fan) in the fuse panel

under the hood, see page 220.

If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone,

stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so and

check the coolant level by looking at the

level visible through the plastic tank – do not

remove the cap.

If the coolant level falls below the MIN mark,

the Saab Information Display (SID) will dis-

play the message

”Coolant level low.

Refill.”.

Pressure gauge

The turbo gauge indicates the air volume for

combustion, which is equivalent to the

engine load.

Under certain barometric conditions, the

needle may enter the first part of the red

zone without necessarily indicating that a

fault has arisen.

If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone

and the engine at the same time loses

power because the monitoring system is

limiting boost pressure, you should contact

a workshop immediately. We recommend

that you contact an authorized Saab work-

shop.

NOTICE

If the needle, despite the above action,

enters the red zone, stop the car immedi-

ately, let the engine idle.

If the needle stays in the red zone, stop

the engine. WARNING

Never open the cap of the expansion tank

completely when the engine is hot, open

with care. The pressure in the cool-

ing-system can cause hot coolant and

steam to be released. Failure to heed this

warning may result in personal injury.

IB3852

95_U S_M 07.book Page 66 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

67Instruments and controls

When the speed of the car exceeds 130 mph

(210 km/h) acceleration is limited by a

reduction in boost pressure. The turbo

gauge will move to the middle field, indicat-

ing a drop in engine output and conse-

quently a reduction in vehicle speed.

Selector lever indication 3

The display below the speedometer indi-

cates the position of the selector lever. If

manual mode is selected, the current gear

is displayed. When the sport function is

selected, SPORT is displayed.

IB4158

95_U S_M 07.book Page 67 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

68 Instruments and controls

Saab Information

Display (SID)

The Saab Information Display (SID) shows

CHECK messages and incorporates eight

trip-computer functions.

Use the i/SET button to browse the func-

tions.

Outdoor temperature

(Frost warning)

Regardless of which function has been

selected, except Night Panel Mode, SID will

automatically display the outdoor tempera-

ture when it is between 26° and 38°F (–3°

and +3°C). This also applies if the

temperature has moved outside the range

of 21° to 43°F (–6° to +6°C) but is again

between 26° and 38°F (–3° and +3°C).

WARNING

It is strongly recommended that the SID

settings be changed only when the car is

stationary. The driver’s attention can oth-

erwise easily be distracted from the road.

SID provides the following function:

Temp. Outside temperature

D.T.E. Estimated range (distance to

empty fuel tank)

Fuel Ø Average fuel consumption

since function last reset

Dist. Distance to destination/Trip

meter

Speed Ø Average speed since function

last reset

Alarm Alarm function

Speed W. Speed warning

WARNING

Remember that roads can be icy even at

temperatures of above 38°F (+3°C),

especially on bridges and stretches of

road that are sheltered from the sun.

IB3928

SID, buttons and display

95_U S_M 07.book Page 68 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

69Instruments and controls

Entering values for the functions

Dist.

1 Select Dist. using the i/SET button.

2 Hold i/SET depressed until a chime

sounds and the selected function is

marked.

3 Set the distance using or .

4 End with a brief press on the i/SET but-

ton.

The calculated arrival time will then

appear next to the distance.

SID calculates arrival time using the set dis-

tance and average vehicle speed.

The values are updated during the trip. If

you take a break, this time is added to the

previously calculated arrival time.

After the distance to destination has

decreased to zero, Dist. will function as a

trip meter (see "Using Dist. as a trip meter").

The starting value for the trip meter will be

the last distance set for the Dist. function.

Example: 100 miles is set for the Dist. func-

tion. Once the countdown has reached

0mile, the Dist. function will act as a trip

meter, beginning at 100 miles.

Alarm

1 Select Alarm with the i/SET button.

2 Hold i/SET depressed until a chime

sounds. Briefly press the i/SET button if

you do not wish to change the alarm

time.

If you wish to change the alarm time,

press or .

End with a brief press on the i/SET

button.

ON appears to the right of the alarm time to

indicate that the alarm will go off at the set

time.

When the alarm sounds, it can be deacti-

vated with CLR.

Activating speed warning

1 Select Speed W. with the i/SET button.

2 Hold i/SET depressed until a chime

sounds. Briefly press the i/SET button if

you do not wish to change speed.

If you wish to change speed, press or

End with a brief press on the i/SET but-

ton.

ON appears to the right of the speed if a

warning will sound when vehicle speed

exceeds the set speed.

Disengaging speed warning

1 Select Speed W. with the i/SETbutton.

2 Briefly press the CLR button.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 69 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

70 Instruments and controls

Using Dist. as a trip meter

If no value is programmed in Dist., it func-

tions as a trip meter. This is indicated by an

arrow to the right in the display.

Reset the trip meter by briefly pressing the

CLR button.

Calculating the arrival time if a specified

average speed is maintained:

1 Select Dist.

2 Set the distance.

3 Select Speed Ø.

4 Set the average speed you intend to

drive at.

5 SID switches to Dist. automatically. The

calculated arrival time is now displayed

to the right.

The Speed Ø function will show actual

values once you start driving.

Average fuel consumption, Fuel Ø

The average fuel consumption is calculated

using the values for fuel consumed and dis-

tance driven since last reset. This value is

stored in the car’s trip computer even when

the engine is switched off.

To reset the value, hold CLR depressed

until a chime sounds. The text Cleared is

displayed.

Resetting values

To reset the value, hold CLR depressed

until a chime sounds. The text Cleared is

displayed.

The following functions will be reset simulta-

neously:

•D.T.E. (the value is reset to the distance

that can be reached with the amount of

remaining fuel)

•Fuel Ø

•Speed Ø (average speed)

Values programmed in Dist., Alarm and

Speed W. are not reset. See respective

function

95_U S_M 07.book Page 70 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

71Instruments and controls

CHECK messages

When the engine is started, CHECKING will

appear on the display for about 4 seconds

while the SID CHECK functions are being

performed.

When a CHECK message is activated while

driving, a chime sounds and the message

appears in SID. The number of possible

CHECK messages varies depending on the

car’s specifications.

If more than one CHECK message has

been generated, the + symbol will appear to

the left of the text on the display. The mes-

sages appear in order of priority.

If a new fault occurs whilst another message

is being displayed, the message relating to

the new one will appear for 10 seconds,

after which the display will return to the ear-

lier one.

Briefly press the CLR button to acknowl-

edge a message from the display. After

acknowledgement, the message is dis-

played each time the ignition is re-started

until remedied.

The following messages may be displayed:

1) This message will be displayed approximately

600 miles (1,000 km) before the next scheduled

service is due, or when 365 days have elapsed

since the last service. The message should be

cleared at the time of that service (see the Saab

Warranties & Service Record Booklet).

This message can also be deleted by first briefly

pressing the CLR button, then depressing it a

second time for at least eight seconds until

”SERVICE” appears on the display and a chime

sounds. The message can only be deleted when

it is shown on the SID.

*) 9-5 SportCombi: the high-mounted stop light is

not included in the autocheck of lights.

Message See

page

Use your seatbelts. 12

Front light failure. 204

Rear light failure. 208

Fog light failure. 205

Brake light failure. 208

Washer fluid level low.

Refill. 203

Coolant level low.

Refill. 195

Remote control battery

low. Replace battery. 49

Key not accepted.

Contact service. 54

Theft protection failure.

Contact service. 54

Gearbox too hot.

Make a safe stop. 154

Tighten fuel filler cap. 147

Time for service. 1) 252

95_U S_M 07.book Page 71 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

72 Instruments and controls

NIGHT PANEL

To improve night-driving conditions inside

the car, the Night Panel mode can be

selected. In this mode, the amount of infor-

mation displayed is reduced, and only the

most important instruments and displays

will be illuminated.

When the NIGHT PANEL button is pressed,

only the speedometer will be illuminated, all

the other instruments illumination being

extinguished and their needles moved to

zero. The SID display will be extinguished

and the backlighting for switches and other

controls will be dimmed. Note: All indicator

and warning lights, together with the display

of CHECK messages, will operate as nor-

mal, except ”Outdoor temperature”, see

page 68.

The following conditions will wake up the

respective displays in the Night-Panel

mode:

• Setting of the Audio system or, SID (dis-

play comes on for ten seconds).

• CHECK message generated in the SID.

• High engine revs cause the rev counter to

be illuminated until the engine speed has

fallen again.

• If the quantity of fuel remaining falls below

4 gallons (15 liters), the fuel gauge will be

illuminated.

• If the engine temperature rises above nor-

mal, the temperature gauge will be illumi-

nated.

• In cars with automatic transmission, if the

selector lever is moved from D to position

M or L, the selector indication on the main

instrument panel will be illuminated.

To restore the displays and lighting to the

normal mode, press the NIGHT PANEL but-

ton.

Units and language versions

The SID has four sets of units:

CHECK messages can be displayed in six

language options: English, Swedish,

German, French, Italian and Spanish.

Selecting units and language

1 Switch off the engine.

2 Briefly press i/SETbutton. Repeat this

until LANGUAGE/UNITS is displayed.

3 Hold i/SET depressed until a chime

sounds. Then select language using

or .

4 Briefly press the i/SET button. Then

select the units using or .

5 Briefly press the i/SET button.

METRIC US GB IMPERIAL

km miles miles miles

km/h mph mph mph

liters US gal gallon gallon

°C °F °C °F

24-hour 12-hour 12-hour 12-hour

95_U S_M 07.book Page 72 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

73Instruments and controls

Switches

The parking lights and daytime running

lights come on automatically when the igni-

tion switch is ON.

Note to owners in the U.S.: If you do not

want Daytime Running Lights, this feature

can be disconnected: switch off the engine

and remove fuse No. 35 (see page 218).

Note to owners in Canada: Daytime Run-

ning Lights must not be disconnected as

they are a Canadian Federal legal require-

ment.

The parking lights can be switched on

regardless of the position of the ignition

switch. Do not use parking lights when driv-

ing.

If the parking lights are on and the driver´s

door is opened, a reminder to turn them off

will sound.

Note: The lighting switch must be in parking

light or headlight position (low beam posi-

tion only) to operate the fog lights (see

page 76).

The headlights come on automatically when

the ignition is ON and go off when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the LOCK position.

The parking lights, however, can be on

when the ignition switch is in the LOCK posi-

tion.

High/low beam

To switch between high and low beam, pull

the control stalk fully towards you

(position 2). When the high beam is on, the

indicator on the main instrument panel will

be illuminated.

High beam flasher

The headlights come on to high beam when

the stalk is pulled to the first spring-loaded

position (position 1) and remain on until the

stalk is released.

Daytime running lights

Parking lights Headlights

IB4122

1 High beam signal

2 High/low beam switching

IB3854

Light switches

In cold and damp weather, the inside of

the headlamp lens may temporarily mist

up. This misting does not affect the func-

tion or service life of the light fitting.

When the lamps are on, the mist will

eventually disappear.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 73 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

74 Instruments and controls

Courtesy Headlight Feature

A delay function allows the headlights to

remain on low beam for about 30 seconds

after the driver’s door has been closed.

To activate this function,

• Switch off the ignition and remove the key

• Open the driver’s door

• Pull the high/low beam control stalk

towards the steering wheel like you are

flashing the high beam, see page 73. The

low beam headlights will now come on

immediately after the driver’s door has

been closed (within 30 seconds) and will

remain on for about 30 seconds.

The length of time for this function can be

adjusted by your authorized Saab dealer. Rear fog light

Press the button to switch on the rear fog

light, which will only come on if the head-

lights are on.

The rear fog light will go off automatically

when the engine is switched off. When the

fog light is next needed, it will have to be

switched on manually again.

The rear fog light consists of one light so it

is not be mistaken for brake lights.

Make sure you are familiar with the appli-

cable provincial/state law regarding the

use of rear fog lights.

WARNING

In poor visibility, avoid following the tail

lights of the vehicle in front of you. If the

vehicle stops suddenly, you may be

unable to avoid a crash and therefore risk

injury to yourself and others.

IB3855

Rear fog light

95_U S_M 07.book Page 74 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

75Instruments and controls

Instrument illumination

The brightness of the instrument illumina-

tion can be varied by means of the dimmer

switch adjacent to the headlight switch.

(See also Night panel on page 72).

In daylight or other equally bright light, the

instrument and switch illumination is auto-

matically extinguished.

Turn signal and lane change

indicators

To switch on the turn signals/lane change

indicators, move the stalk up or down.

The stalk has fixed positions for indicating a

right or left turn, and the indicators are can-

celled automatically (stalk returns to off

position).

The stalk also has an intermediate,

spring-loaded position that is useful for sig-

nalling when changing lanes or passing.

The respective indicator lights on the instru-

ment panel flash at the same frequency as

the direction indicators.

IB3856

IB4126

Turn signal and lane change indicators

1 Right indicators

2 Left indicators

Instrument illumination

95_U S_M 07.book Page 75 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

76 Instruments and controls

Front fog lights 3

The front fog lights can be activated in both

low beam headlight and parking light posi-

tions. Fog lights should only be used in poor

visibility conditions.

Make sure you are familiar with the appli-

cable provincial/state law regarding the

use of fog lights.

Hazard warning lights

When this button is pressed, all the turn

signal indicators and a symbol in the button

flash simultaneously. If the ignition is on,

both indicator lights on the instrument panel

will also flash.

If the hazard warning lights are left on for

some time, the flasher frequency will be

reduced to save the battery.

Hazard warning lights should only be used

if the car constitutes a hazard to other road

users.

Reversing lights

The reversing lights come on automatically

when reverse gear is engaged or selected

with the ignition switched on.

WARNING

Switch on the hazard flashers if the car

has to be left at the roadside on account

of a crash, engine trouble or a puncture.

If you carry a warning triangle or flares,

they should be set up along the side of the

road 300 ft. (100 m) behind your vehicle.

If the car is not clearly visible (e.g. over

the brow of a hill or bridge), place the tri-

angle/flare even further back.

IB3858

IB3859

Hazard warning lights

95_U S_M 07.book Page 76 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

77Instruments and controls

Wipers and washers

There are three intermittent wiper positions.

Moving the control stalk to the

spring-loaded position between 0 and 2 will

produce a single sweep of the wipers.

The wipers are designed for optimal clean-

ing at all driving speeds. At higher speeds,

it may be possible to detect a slight ”sweep-

ing” sound. This may be due to the

increased air pressure on the blades at

higher speeds.

Headlight washers 3

If low beam is on, the headlights are washed

every fifth time the windshield washers are

used or if 2 minutes have elapsed since the

windshield was last washed. The headlight

washers cannot be activated separately.

The headlight washers are of the high-pres-

sure type, which means that other parts of

the car may become wet if you activate the

washers while the car is stationary.

Rain sensing wipers 3The rain sensor automatically controls the

windshield wipers. The sensor is located on

the windshield beside the rearview mirror.

The system varies between single sweeps

of the windshield and continuous wiping

depending on how much water or snow

there is on the windshield.

Activate the system by lifting the control

stalk to position 1. The wipers make one

sweep for reference to see how much water

and snow is on the windshield. In future, the

sensor compares the amount of water and

snow on the windshield with this reference

value.

WARNING

Turn the rain sensor off if the ignition is

ON when clearing snow and ice from the

windshield, to avoid personal injury.

NOTICE

To avoid damaging the windshield wip-

ers, turn the rain sensor off before wash-

ing the car in an automatic carwash.

IB359

0 OFF

1 Intermittent operation

2 Low speed

3 High speed

4 Washers

IB569

Control for setting wiper delay

1 Long delay

2 Short delay

95_U S_M 07.book Page 77 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

78 Instruments and controls

When the engine has been switched off,

the control stalk must be moved to posi-

tion 0 and back to position 1 to reactivate

the sensor.

Set the sensitivity using the control on the

wiper stalk (the same control as used for

wiper delay on cars not fitted with a rain sen-

sor). The sensor has three sensitivity set-

tings. It is most sensitive when in the upper-

most position (1). When a higher degree of

sensitivity is selected, the wipers make one

sweep of the windshield for reference.

The rain sensor has a daylight and a night

time mode. The sensor measures the

amount of available light and automatically

selects the appropriate mode. The sensor is

more sensitive at night. The function of the

rain sensor is impaired by dry snow.

Rear-window wiper

(SportCombi) 3

The rear-window wiper and washer are

operated with the same stalk switch as used

for washing and wiping the windshield and

headlights.

This stalk has two additional switches,

ON/OFF and .

The ON position provides intermittent wip-

ing.

The position provides washing and

wiping. After a few sweeps the wiper stops

or reverts to intermittent wiping, if this has

been chosen. About 15 seconds after com-

pletion of the washing/wiping of the rear

window, the wiper makes a single sweep to

wipe away any remaining washer fluid.

A spring-loaded position between the OFF

and ON positions allows for a single sweep

of the rear-window wiper.

Intermittent wiping of the rear window

occurs when reverse gear is engaged if the

windshield wipers are in position 1, 2 or 3,

see page 77.

IB1207

Rear-window wiper

1 Intermittent wiping

2 Washers

95_U S_M 07.book Page 78 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

79Instruments and controls

Automatic climate

control (ACC)

The ACC system automatically works to

maintain the desired temperature inside the

car.

The system will achieve the desired temper-

ature in the quickest possible way. Note that

selecting a higher or lower temperature than

that desired will not speed up the process.

For the ACC system to be most effective, all

windows (and moonroof 3) should be

closed.

Fresh air for the cabin is drawn in through an

inlet grille adjacent to the bottom edge of the

windshield. The air flows through a filter

upstream of the ACC system before deliv-

ery to the cabin. Cabin air is evacuated via

openings in the rear parcel shelf and then

through outlets on either side of the car

behind the rear bumper.

The incoming air is treated in three stages:

first it passes through a filter; it is then dehu-

midified and cooled and, finally, if required,

heated.

The filter is a combined particle and char-

coal filter. It is so efficient that levels of nox-

ious substances such as benzene and tolu-

ene are also reduced.

To reduce the likelihood of misting on the

insides of the windows, the glass should be

cleaned with a quality window cleaner. How

often this will need to be done depends on

how clean the air is – if there are smokers in

the car, cleaning will need to be done more

frequently.

IB3860

910

8 7

ACC panel

1 Temperature setting: LH side

2 AUTO: All settings selected automatically

3 Manual setting of fan speed

4 Manual setting of air distribution

5 Temperature setting: RH side

6 Recirculation: ON/OFF

7 Rear-window heating: ON/OFF

8 A/C compressor: ON/OFF

9 Ventilated front seats 3

10 Heated front seats 3

95_U S_M 07.book Page 79 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

80 Instruments and controls

The system has five sensors:

• Outdoor temperature sensor

• Interior temperature sensor

• Sun sensor (mounted on top of the fascia)

• Two blended-air temperature sensors

(mounted inside the front floor vents)

Note: If anything is placed over the sun sen-

sor, the ACC system will not function prop-

erly.

Panel vents

The panel vents swivel in all directions so

that air can be directed as desired. In winter,

for instance, the outer vents can be directed

onto the door windows for enhanced

demisting.

The flow of air through the panel vents can

be controlled individually for each vent by

means of the adjacent control. The climate

control system works best if the panel vents

are open. If you find the air cold or that it is

drafty, start by directing the air away from

the body. If the center vent is aimed up, it will

cool the interior temperature sensor and

you may need to adjust ACC up or down,

depending upon temperature desired.

IB362

Panel vent

IB3861

1 Interior-temperature sensor

2 Sun sensor

95_U S_M 07.book Page 80 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

81Instruments and controls

Temperature control

The cabin is divided into two temperature

zones:

• The driver’s zone

• The passenger zone (front and rear

seats)

The desired temperature can be set

between 60 and 80°F.

The displayed temperature is not the abso-

lute temperature but corresponds to the

comfort level normally experienced at that

temperature after allowance has been

made for the air flow, relative humidity, solar

radiation, etc., currently prevailing inside

the car.

• The most usual temperature setting is

64–76°F, depending on personal prefer-

ence and what clothing is worn.

• To allow the system time to adjust,

changes in the temperature setting shall

only be made in steps of 2°F.

Once the desired climate has been

achieved, the rear center vents can be

closed to prevent warm air being distributed

at face height.

When the ignition is switched off, only the

temperature control affects the system the

next time the engine is started. The system

will warm up/cool down to the temperature

to which the control is set.

MAX heat, red indication

The MAX heat setting is obtained by turning

the temperature control to the first position

past 80 (to the red LED). The driver’s side

selection regulates air distribution and recir-

culation status. Temperature, however, can

be adjusted on the passenger side.

Settings when MAX heat is selected:

• Maximum heat

• Air distribution to windshield and floor

• Recirculation OFF (even if manually

selected before)

• Fan: high speed

MAX cooling, blue indicator

The MAX cooling setting is obtained by turn-

ing the temperature control to the first posi-

tion past 60 (to the blue LED). The driver’s

side selection regulates air distribution and

recirculation status. Temperature, however,

can be adjusted on the passenger side.

Settings when MAX cooling is selected:

• Maximum cooling (A/C compressor will

run even if AC OFF manually selected

before)

• Air distribution through panel vents

• Fan: maximum speed

• Recirculation ON

IB369

Air vent at rear side window

95_U S_M 07.book Page 81 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

82 Instruments and controls

Functions

Pressing AUTO will cancel all manual settings.

If a manual function is selected, it will be locked in but other functions

will be controlled automatically.

The selected temperature is always maintained automatically.

Temperature, air distribution, fan speed and recircu-

lation will be controlled automatically.

Pressing AUTO once will cancel all previous manual

selections.

The ACC system is in AUTO mode when the engine

is started.

A/C compressor OFF.

No cooling of inlet air. Temperature, air distribution

and fan speed still under automatic control.

Turn the fan control anticlockwise until "OFF" lights

up.

ACC system OFF.

Fan OFF.

A/C compressor OFF.

Air distribution selections locked in current settings.

Recirculation can be selected manually.

Heating 3 and ventilation 3 of the front seats is deac-

tivated.

Pressing the AUTO button will put the system into

automatic mode.

Reactivation by turning the fan control clockwise one

click causes the system to resume any manual selec-

tions.

The rear window and door mirror heating is controlled

manually.

Deactivate the heating as soon as the rear window is

clear of ice and misting to avoid imposing a heavy load

on the battery longer than necessary. Note, however,

that heating will deactivate automatically after a set

time, depending on the outside temperature.

The ACC system can be programmed to activate heat-

ing automatically when outside temperature is below

+5 °C and the temperature inside the car is below

+10 °C. See page 85.

Turn the fan control to increase fan speed.

If fan speed 0 is selected, the A/C compressor will be

disengaged and the indicator on the AC OFF button

will illuminate.

Recirculation is controlled automatically to optimize

cooling although it can also be switched on and off

manually.

Recirculation does not appreciably change the air

quality but it can be useful to switch it on to avoid

unpleasant smells from entering the cabin.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 82 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

83Instruments and controls

Air distribution

One press: When the defroster is chosen manually,

all the windows (except the rear side windows,

where the air flow is off) are demisted by:

• Fan: high speed.

• The air is directed to the defroster vents.

• Temperature increases somewhat.

• Recirculation OFF.

• Activation of rear window/door mirror heating.

The defroster function remains active until another

selection is made. Note, however, that rear win-

dow/door mirror heating will deactivate automati-

cally after a set time, depending on the outside

temperature.

Two presses: Air is directed to the windscreen

without the fan speed being increase or the rear

window heating being switched on.

To revert to a previous setting, press the AUTO

button.

IB3862

Defroster and floor vents

Floor vents and rear side windows

Floor and panel vents

IB3863

IB3864IB3865

95_U S_M 07.book Page 83 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

84 Instruments and controls

Starting in cold weather

To start with, the system will automatically select the defroster set-

ting, maximum heat and low fan speed.

As the engine warms up, air will also be distributed through the floor

vents and the fan speed will be increased.

As the temperature inside the car nears the selected value, both the

fan speed and the heat will be decreased to a level determined by

the system.

Starting in hot weather

The system will automatically distribute air through the panel vents

at high fan speed and will switch on the A/C compressor (unless the

AC OFF switch has been pressed).

If the outdoor temperature is above 77°F (25°C), the system might

select recirculation after 0-15 seconds if this is required in order to

reach the desired temperature.

As the temperature inside the car nears the selected value, the fan

speed will be decreased to a value determined by the system.

Panel (and center rear vent)

IB3866

95_U S_M 07.book Page 84 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

85Instruments and controls

Adaptation of ACC

It is also possible to customize the ACC system, e.g. to adapt to

driving and weather conditions.

Adaptation and restoration of factory settings is done by holding

the respective button depressed approx. 2 seconds until a chime

sounds.

Make sure the ignition is ON.

Example: If you want the ACC system to handle activation and deac-

tivation of rear window/door mirror heating, hold the button

depressed approx. 2 seconds until a chime sounds.

The display shows:

ACC:AUTO

RDEFR CTRL

When “Adaptation of ACC“ is done, it will apply until factory settings

are restored.

Function Operation in AUTO mode

after adaptation

Factory setting

The rear window heating will

come on after the engine has

started if the outside temper-

ature is below +5 °C.

– This function helps to pre-

vent ice or mist forming on

the rear window in cold,

damp weather. Fuel con-

sumption may increase

slightly.

Heating is selected

manually.

Seat heating comes on if the

system determines that

heating is necessary based

on the temperature in the

seat and the outside temper-

ature

There are two settings

for heating. Repeat-

edly pressing the but-

ton switches between

low output, high output

and off.

Function Display text in SID

during adaptation

Display text in SID when

factory settings are

restored

ACC:AUTO

RDEFR CTRL

ACC:MANUAL

RDEFR CTRL

ACC:AUTO

SEAT HEATING

ACC:MANUAL

SEAT HEATING

95_U S_M 07.book Page 85 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

86 Instruments and controls

Calibration

Calibration is carried out automatically after

a certain number of starts if the ignition has

been switched off for more than 2 hours.

If the battery has been disconnected or has

run flat, the system will need to be recali-

brated.

Calibration is started manually as follows:

1 Start the engine.

2 Press and at the same

time.

When manual calibration starts,

” ACC:CALIBR.

STARTED”

appears in SID.

Calibration takes approx. 30 seconds.

Useful tips

(before taking the car to a workshop. We

recommend that you contact an authorized

Saab workshop.)

• If the battery has been disconnected or

has run flat, the system will need to be

recalibrated. See "Calibration" above.

• If front seat heating and/or rear window

heating do not function satisfactorily, see

"Adaptation of ACC" on page 85.

Condensation water

When the A/C system is running, the intake

air is dehumidified, and the resultant con-

densation is drained off through two outlets

underneath the floor of the car, in the vicinity

of the front doors.

It is therefore perfectly normal for water to

be seen dripping from these outlets when

the car is parked. The warmer the ambient

air and the higher the humidity, the more

condensation water will form.

Formation of ice and mist in

extreme weather conditions

It is only in the most extreme conditions that

icing and misting of window glass are likely

to be a problem, e.g. in torrential rain or

severe cold coupled with high relative

humidity, or when passengers are perspir-

ing heavily or wearing wet clothes.

The following measures are recommended

if such problems should occur:

1 Select AUTO and 21 °C for both temper-

ature zones.

2 Select Defroster.

If this is not enough...

3 Increase the fan speed.

If this is not enough...

4 Select a higher temperature.

The following measures are recommended

if the occupants feel that it is cold and

draughty in the car:

1 Make sure that all the air vents are fully

open, including the center rear vent. If

this is not enough...

2 Direct the air flow away from the body. If

this is not enough...

3 Raise the temperature setting a degree

or two. If this is not enough...

4 Lower the fan speed.

Troubleshooting and care, see page 243.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 86 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

87Instruments and controls

Heated front seats 3

The heating of the seat cushion and back-

rest of both front seats is adjustable and

thermostat-controlled.

The heating is adjustable in two stages.

Ventilated front seats 3

Ventilated front seats, that enhance seating

comfort in hot weather, are available as an

option on cars equipped with leather-uphol-

stered and electrically adjustable seats.

Ventilated seats are equipped with two fans

that extract the moist air from between the

seat and the body.

The fans have two speeds.

Heated rear seat cushion 3

Electrically heated seat cushions for the two

outer seats in the back are available as an

option.

The ON/OFF control button for the cushion

heating is located on the back of the center

console.

How long the cushions are heated for

depends on the outside temperature. The

heating can also be turned off with the

button.

The button has an integral indicator that is

illuminated when the heating is on.

IB3837

IB3836

IB407

95_U S_M 07.book Page 87 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

88 Instruments and controls

(This page has been left blank.)

95_U S_M 07.book Page 88 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

89Saab 9-5 Audio System

Radio _______________ 93

CD player ____________ 99

CD changer 3________ 100

MP3 player___________ 102

Portable player 3_____ 104

General functions _____ 105

Sound system ________ 107

Technical data________ 108

Antennas ____________ 109

Error codes __________ 112

Security lock _________ 112

IB4469

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,

market specification, options or accessories).

Saab 9-5 Audio System

95_U S_M 07.book Page 89 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

90 Saab 9-5 Audio System

Saab 9-5 Audio

System 3

To get the best out of your Saab 9-5 Audio

System, we recommend that you read

through this entire section.

The Saab 9-5 Audio System consists of a

head unit with radio, CD player/CD

changer 3 for CD and MP3 discs and CD

changer 3 in the luggage compartment.

The audio system is operated using the

steering wheel controls 3 or the control

panel buttons.

All work on the audio system must be carried out

by a workshop. We recommend that you contact

an authorized Saab dealer.

WARNING

Safety first!

Cut off power immediately and contact

your Saab dealer if the system begins to

emit smoke or smells strange.

Audio system

activation/deactivation.

Volume adjust.

The tone control is used to

adjust tone and speaker set-

tings, change CD track or MP3

file and manual adjust radio

frequency.

Information on artist, album

and song title. Display of radio

text.

Setup menu.

IB3782

95_U S_M 07.book Page 90 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

91Saab 9-5 Audio System

Steering wheel controls 3

Scroll among preset pages.

The menu option in the display

is selected with the corre-

sponding pushbutton directly

underneath.

No function on U.S./CA cars.

Select XMTM 3 program type

when the radio is in the

XMTM 3 mode.

Cars with CD changer 3:

insert CD or MP3 disc or discs.

Cars without CD-changer 3:

set time and date.

Eject CD or MP3 disc.

Activate radio and change fre-

quency band (AM,FM and

XMTM 3).

Auto tuning down and change

track/file going back in order of

play on CD or MP3 disc.

Auto tuning up and change

track/file forward in order of

play on CD or MP3 disc.

Manual tuning and rapid play

back for a track/file on a CD or

MP3 disc.

Manual tuning and rapid play

forward for a track/file on a CD

or MP3 disc.

Activate CD media or portable

player.

"arrow up"/"arrow down":

change preset for radio stations,

change track on CD or MP3

player.

"Seek UP": auto tuning up, select

next track on CD or MP3 disc.

Activate radio station scan

SRC: press to switch between

AM, FM, XMTM 3, CD, MP3,

CD changer or portable player.

VOL: adjust volume.

IB3935

95_U S_M 07.book Page 91 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

92 Saab 9-5 Audio System

Switching the audio

system On/Off

The audio system will come on:

• When the ignition is switched ON and/or

the ON/OFF control is pressed.

ON/OFF control

The audio system will be

switched off:

• When the ON/OFF control is pressed.

• When the ignition key is removed.

• One hour after the ignition was switched

OFF, if the ignition key has not been

removed.

• 1 hour after the audio system has been

switched on if the key is not in the ignition

switch.

Audio settings

Volume

Turn the ON/OFF control until the desired

volume is obtained.

Tone controls

Tone and speaker settings

Manual tone and speaker settings

1 Press the tone control to open the menu

for tone and speaker settings.

2 Press the pushbutton under the desired

tone/speaker setting.

3 Adjust the selected setting by turning

the tone control. The selected settings

can also be adjusted by pressing the

SEEK, FWD or REV button.

Centering tone and speaker settings

Hold the tone control depressed until a

chime sounds to center all tone and speaker

settings.

Automatic tone setting

You can choose to automatically adapt tone

setting, Auto EQ (Equalizer), to the tuned

station or disc being played.

1 Press the tone control to open the menu

for tone settings.

2 Press the pushbutton under the menu

option Auto EQ label.

3 Press the pushbutton under the desired

tone setting.

4 The tone settings menu automatically

returns to the previous menu within

5 seconds.

Auto EQ menu

95_U S_M 07.book Page 92 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

93Saab 9-5 Audio System

Radio

Press the RADIO BAND button to return to

radio mode if another audio source is in use.

Selecting a radio station

Selecting a frequency band

Press the RADIO BAND button to change

frequency band. The selected frequency

band appears on the display.

Selecting a preset station

Scroll to the desired preset page by press-

ing the FAV button and then pressing the

pushbutton (1-6) under the desired preset

station.

You can also press or on the steering

wheel to select another preset station.

Tuning a station

Fine tuning

Turn the tone control one increment or

press the REV or FWD button to fine-tune

the frequency in increments of 0.2 MHz.

Automatic tuning

Press one of the SEEK buttons or the

button on the steering wheel for automatic

seek tuning. The radio then searches

upward in the frequency band for the near-

est strong station and stops at that fre-

quency.

Manual tuning

Turn the tone control or hold the REV or

FWD button depressed to seek a frequency

manually. Release the control/button to

stop at the desired frequency.

Scanning radio stations

Hold one of the SEEK buttons or the

button on the steering wheel depressed

until a chime sounds for a 5 second sam-

pling of each station accessible on the fre-

quency band. Scanning... appears on the

display.

Press one of the SEEK buttons or the

button on the steering wheel again to cancel

the scan and select the radio station being

played at that instant.

Storing presets

You can store up to 36 radio stations as pre-

sets by using the 6 pushbuttons under the

display and the FAV button. Press the FAV

button to scroll through up to 6 pages with

6 presets per page. Each page can contain

a combination of AM, FM and XMTM 3

stations.

Storing the current station as a preset

To store the current station as a preset:

1 Press the FAV button until you come to

the preset page (1-6) at which the sta-

tion is to be stored.

2 Hold the pushbutton depressed under

the spot (1-36) at which the station is to

be stored. A chime will sound once the

station is stored.

Preset stations

95_U S_M 07.book Page 93 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

94 Saab 9-5 Audio System

Number of pages with preset stations

To display the number of pages (1-6) with

preset stations:

1 Hold the FAV button depressed or press

the MENU button and then press the

pushbutton under the menu option

FAV 1-6.

Setup menu

2 Select the number of preset pages to be

displayed by pressing the pushbutton

under the menu option with the desired

number of preset pages (1-6).

Number of preset pages

Radio Data System (RDS)

The audio system has a Radio Data System

(RDS). RDS features are available for use

only on FM stations that broadcast RDS

information. With RDS, the radio can do the

following:

• Display radio station name.

• Display messages from radio stations.

• This system relies on receiving specific

information from these stations and will

only work when the information is avail-

able. In rare cased, a radio station may

broadcast incorrect information that will

cause the radio features to work

improperly. If this happens, contact the

radio station.

The RDS system is always on. When infor-

mation is broadcast from the FM station you

are listening to, the station name or call let-

ters will be displayed on the display.

RDS menu

Rolling advertisements

Some radio stations present rolling adver-

tisements in the display.

• To block rolling advertisements, mark

PS-Freeze by pressing the pushbutton

directly underneath.

• To allow rolling advertisements, deselect

PS-Freeze by pressing the pushbutton

directly underneath.

Press the pushbutton under the arrow

symbol or wait until the system automati-

cally returns to the previous menu.

Radio text

Press the i button to show text messages

sent by certain radio stations in the display.

If there are no text messages, No Info

appears on the display.

NOTICE

The menu options AF and REG have no

function on US/CA cars.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 94 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

95Saab 9-5 Audio System

XMTM 3 Satellite Radio Service

XMTM is a satellite radio service based in

the 48 contiguous United States and Can-

ada. XMTM offers a large variety of coast-

to-coast channels including commercial

free music, news, sports, talk, traffic/

weather (U.S. subscriders), and children‘s

programming.

XMTM provides digital quality audio and text

information that includes song title and artist

name.

A service fee is required in order to receive

the XMTM service. For more information,

contact XMTM :

In the US. at www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

In Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

When XMTM is active, the channel name,

and number, song title and artist can be dis-

played.

Finding a XMTM 3 station

The PTY button is used to find XMTM

stations when the radio is in the XMTM

mode. To find XMTM channels within a

desired category, perform the following:

1 Press the RADIO BAND button until the

XMTM frequency is displayed. Press the

PTY button to display the category

labels on the radio display. Continue

pressing the PTY button until the

desired category name is displayed.

2 Press either of the two pushbuttons

below the desired category label to

immediately tune to the first XMTM sta-

tion associated with that category.

3 Turn the tone control, press the buttons

below the right or left arrows displayed,

or press the right or left SEEK buttons to

go to the next or previous XMTM station

within the selected category.

4 To exit the category search mode, press

the FAV button to display your favorites

again.

Remove an XMTM 3 category

Undesired XMTM categories can be

removed through the Setup menu. To

remove an undesired category, perform

the following:

1 Press the MENU button to display the

radio Setup menu.

2 Press the pushbutton under the menu

option XM CAT.

3 Turn the tone control to display the cate-

gory you wish to remove.

4 Press the pushbutton under the menu

option Rem ove until the category name

along with the word Removed appears

on the display.

5 Repeat the steps to remove more cate-

gories.

NOTICE

The menu option XM CAT can only be

accessed when the vehicle is stationary.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 95 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

96 Saab 9-5 Audio System

Restore removed XMTM 3 categories

Removed categories can be restored by

pressing the pushbutton under the menu

option Add when a removed category is dis-

played or by pressing the pushbutton under

the menu option R estore All.

Decades

Country

Hits

Christian

Rock

Urban

Jazz & Blues

Dance

Latin

World

Classical

Kids

News

Sports

Comedy

Tal k & Va r i e ty

Premium

The XM Categories

95_U S_M 07.book Page 96 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

97Saab 9-5 Audio System

XMTM 3 Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

XM Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated an no action is required.

This process should take no longer than 30 seconds.

No XM signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking

the XMTM signal. When you move into an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio

(after four second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text data. No action is

needed. This message should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune in to another channel.

Channel Unavail Channel no longer

available

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned. Tune to another station.

If this station was one of the presets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Artist Info Artist Name/Feature not

available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel. The system is work-

ing properly.

No Title Info Song/Program Title not

available

No song title information is available at this time on this channel. The system is

working properly.

No CAT Info Category Name not

available

No category information is available at this time on this channel. The system is

working properly.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 97 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

98 Saab 9-5 Audio System

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

Not Found No channel available for the

chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category. The system is working

properly.

No Information No Text/Informational

message available

No text or informational messages are available at this time on this channel.

The system is working properly.

XM Theftlocked Theft lock active The XMTM receiver in the vehicle may have previously been in another vehicle.

For security purposes, XMTM

receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If

this message is received after having your vehicle serviced, check with your Saab

dealer.

XM Radion ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the XMTM Radio eight digit

radio ID label. This label is needed to activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known (should

only be if hardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there nay be a receiver fault.

Consult with your Saab dealer.

Check XM Receiver Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time, the receiver may have

a fault. Consult with your Saab dealer.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 98 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

99Saab 9-5 Audio System

CD player

Activate the CD player by inserting a disc or

by pressing the CD AUX button if a CD is

already loaded.

CD player menu

Loading CDs

Insert the disc in the slot with the text side

up until the mechanism loads the disc. The

first track is played. If the disc is

wrong-side-up, it will be ejected automati-

cally.

Once all the tracks have been played, the

CD player will restart from track 1.

The CD player is turned off by pressing

ON/OFF to turn off the audio system or by

selecting another audio source.

Removing CDs

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD. If

you press EJECT without removing the

ejected disc, the player will reload the disc

after 10 seconds for reasons of safety.

Selecting and changing tracks

Turn the tone control or press the SEEK but-

tons to select or change to the preceding or

next track. The track number appears in the

display.

If the current track has played for at least

10 seconds, you can start the track from the

beginning by pressing SEEK (arrow left).

If you press SEEK (arrow right) while the

last track of the disc is playing, the first track

will play.

If you press SEEK (arrow left) while the first

track of the disc is playing, the last track will

play.

The same function applies to and on

the steering wheel.

Rapid playing tracks

To rapid play the current track, hold REV or

FWD depressed. Release the button to stop

rapid play and return to normal playback.

Random playback

You can allow the CD player to choose

tracks randomly, i.e. not to play the tracks in

numerical order.

• To play tracks randomly, press the push-

button under the menu option RDM.

• To resume playing tracks in numerical

order, press the pushbutton under the

menu option RDM again.

Random playback

NOTICE

Do not use CDs with labels or stickers.

These labels could detach and cause the

audio system to malfunction.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 99 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

100 Saab 9-5 Audio System

CD changer 3

Activate the CD changer by inserting one or

more CD/MP3 discs or by pressing the CD

AUX button if one or more discs is already

loaded.

Loading CDs

Loading a CD

1 Press the LOAD button. The following

appears on the display: Please Wait

2 Wait until the loading mechanism is

ready for the disc. The following appears

on the display: Insert CD

3 Insert the disc in the slot with the text

side up until the mechanism loads the

disc. The following appears on the dis-

play: Loading

If the disc is wrong-side-up, it will be ejected

automatically.

Loading several CDs

The CD changer can be loaded with up to

6 discs. To load several discs in the CD

changer:

1 Hold LOAD depressed for 2 seconds. A

chime sounds and the following appears

on the display: Please Wait

2 Follow the instructions on the display to

load the discs.

3 If you do not wish to load more CDs,

press LOAD to cancel.

CD changer menu

The CD changer is turned off by pressing

ON/OFF to turn off the audio system or by

selecting another audio source.

Removing CDs

Removing a CD

1 Press EJECT to eject the disc. A chime

sounds and the following appears on the

display: Ejecting

2 Remove the ejected disc when the fol-

lowing appears on the display:

Remove CD

If you press EJECT without removing

the ejected disc, the player will reload

the disc after 10 seconds for reasons of

safety.

Removing several CDs

Hold EJECT depressed for 2 seconds to

remove all discs from the CD changer. A

chime sounds and the following appears on

the display: Ejecting All

NOTICE

Do not use CD or CD-R discs with labels

or stickers. These labels could detach

and cause the audio system to malfunc-

tion.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 100 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

101Saab 9-5 Audio System

Selecting and changing tracks

Turn the tone control or press the SEEK but-

tons to select or change to the preceding or

next track. The track number appears in the

display.

If the current track has played for at least

10 seconds, you can start the track from the

beginning by pressing SEEK (arrow left).

If you press SEEK (arrow right) while the

last track of the disc is playing, the first track

will play.

If you press SEEK (arrow left) while the first

track of the disc is playing, the last track will

play.

The same function applies to and on

the steering wheel.

For selecting/changing MP3 files, see

page 102.

Selecting/changing CD

Press the pushbuttons under the menu

option CD in the display to change CDs.

For selecting/changing MP3 folder, see

page 103.

Selecting/changing CD

Rapid playing tracks

To rapid play the current track, hold REV or

FWD depressed. Release the button to stop

rapid play and return to normal playback.

For rapid playing an MP3 file, see page 103.

Random playback

You can allow the CD changer to choose

tracks randomly from all CDs, i.e. not to play

the tracks in numerical order.

• To play tracks randomly, press the push-

button under the menu option RDM.

• To resume playing tracks in numerical

order, press the pushbutton under the

menu option RDM again.

For random playback of MP3 files, see

page 103.

Random playback from all CDs

95_U S_M 07.book Page 101 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

102 Saab 9-5 Audio System

MP3 player

The audio system can play MP3 files

recorded on an CD-R disc with the following

bit speed: 32 - 320 kbps. Sound quality may

vary depending on the quality of the CD-R

disc, recording method and quality of the

recorded music.

The audio system can read and play a max-

imum of 50 MP3 files, 50 playlists, 10 ses-

sions and 255 MP3 files. Discs containing

several folders, playlists, sessions and files

can be played up to the max. limit. Anything

over the max. limit will be ignored.

Activating the MP3 player

Activate the MP3 player by inserting a CD-R

disc with MP3 files into the slot or by press-

ing the CD AUX button if a disc with MP3

files is already loaded.

The first file in the first playlist on the disc is

played and the following appears on the dis-

play:

MP3 player

Loading MP3 discs

To load an MP3 disc, insert the disc in the

slot with the text side up until the mecha-

nism loads the disc. The first MP3 file in the

first playlist of the disc will then be played.

If the disc is wrong-side-up, it will be ejected

automatically.

For loading one or more MP3 discs in the

CD changer, see page 100.

Removing MP3 discs

Press the EJECT button to eject the MP3

disc. If you press EJECT without removing

the ejected disc, the player will reload the

disc after 10 seconds for reasons of safety.

For removing one or more MP3 discs from

the CD changer, see page 100.

Selecting/changing MP3 file

Turn the tone control or press the SEEK but-

tons to select or change to the preceding or

next MP3 file in the current MP3 folder or

playlist. The MP3 file number appears in the

display.

If the current MP3 file has played for at least

10 seconds, you can start the MP3 file from

the beginning by pressing SEEK (arrow

left).

If you press SEEK (arrow right) while the

last MP3 file in a folder or playlist is playing,

the first MP3 file of the folder or playlist will

play.

If you press SEEK (arrow left) while the first

MP3 file in a folder or playlist is playing, the

last MP3 file of the folder or playlist will play.

The same function applies to and on

the steering wheel.

NOTICE

Do not use CD-R discs with labels or

stickers. These labels could detach and

cause the audio system to malfunction.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 102 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

103Saab 9-5 Audio System

Selecting/changing MP3 folder

• Press the left pushbutton under the Folder

symbol to play the first MP3 file in the pre-

ceding MP3 folder on the disc.

• Press the right pushbutton under the

Folder symbol to play the first MP3 file of

the next MP3 folder on the disc.

Rapid playing an MP3 file

To rapid play the current MP3 file, hold REV

or FWD depressed. Release the button to

stop rapid play and return to normal play-

back.

Random playback of MP3 files

You can allow the MP3 player to randomly

select MP3 files, i.e. not to play the files in

numerical order.

• For random playback of MP3 files, press

the pushbutton under the menu option

RDM.

• To resume playing MP3 files in numerical

order, press the pushbutton under the

menu option RDM again.

Random playback of MP3 files

Playback order

Files on a CD-R disc will be played in the fol-

lowing order:

• The first MP3 file in the first playlist will be

played, followed by all files in each playl-

ist. When the last MP3 file in the last play-

list has been played, playback starts from

the beginning with the first MP3 file in the

first playlist.

• The first MP3 file in the first MP3 folder will

be played, followed by all files in each

folder. When the last MP3 file in the last

folder has been played, playback starts

from the beginning with the first MP3 file

in the first folder.

Sorting music

To play MP3 files sorted by artist or album,

press the pushbutton under the magnifying

glass in the display.

The CD player searches through the disc

and sorts files by artist and album. This

could take several minutes depending on

the number of MP3 files on the disc.

Once the sort is complete, select sort order

by pressing the pushbutton under the menu

option Sort.

• To sort and play MP3 files by artist, press

the pushbutton under the menu option

Artist.

• To sort and play MP3 files by album,

press the pushbutton under the menu

option Album .

95_U S_M 07.book Page 103 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

104 Saab 9-5 Audio System

Song title, artist name, etc.

If a disc has been recorded with ID3 data

(version 1 & 2), the song title, artist name,

album title and MP3 folder name can be

shown in the display.

1 Press the i button.

2 Press the pushbutton under the desired

menu option. The song title, artist name,

album title or MP3 folder name appears

in the display.

3 Press the pushbutton under the arrow

symbol to return to the previous menu.

File names with more than 32 characters or

four pages will be shortened.

Information menu

Portable player

AUX input 3

The AUX input is located at the bottom right

of the audio system. It can be used to con-

nect a portable unit, such as an MP3 player,

to the audio system.

Adjust the sound settings using the control

panel or the steering wheel controls. To

change tracks, fast forward, etc., use the

controls on the portable player.

AUX input at the bottom right of the audio

system

Connecting and activating a

portable player

1 Connect the unit to the audio system via

the AUX input.

2 Press the CD AUX button to activate the

portable player.

WARNING

Place the portable player where it cannot

be thrown around and cause personal

injury in the event of a collision.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 104 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

105Saab 9-5 Audio System

General functions

Setting time and date

Cars without CD changer

1 Press the Clock button.

2 Press the pushbutton under the menu

option you wish to change.

3 Press the pushbutton again to increase

time or date one increment at a time. You

can also adjust time and date by press-

ing the SEEK, FWD or REV button.

Cars with CD changer

1 Press the MENU button.

2 Press the pushbutton under the clock

symbol in the display.

3 Press the pushbutton under the menu

option you wish to change.

4 Press the pushbutton again to increase

time or date one increment at a time. You

can also adjust time and date by press-

ing the SEEK, FWD or REV button.

Setting time and date

Time and date display

1 In the clock menu, press the pushbutton

under the arrow symbol in the display.

2 Specify whether time should be dis-

played with the 12-hour or 24-hour

system and in which order date is to be

indicated by pressing the pushbutton

under the desired menu option.

Time and date display

WARNING

Adjustments should be made when the

car is stationary so that attention to traffic

is not reduced, increasing the likelihood

of an accident.

NOTICE

The menu option RDS <clock> has no

function on US/CA cars.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 105 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

106 Saab 9-5 Audio System

Speed dependent volume

compensation

As vehicle speed increases, ambient noise

also increases. If you do not wish to contin-

ually adjust the volume, the audio system

can automatically adjust volume based on

an increase or decrease in vehicle speed.

Select one of four settings:

•Off (no compensation)

•Low (low compensation)

•Med (medium compensation)

•High (maximum compensation)

1 Press the MENU button.

2 Press the pushbutton under the menu

option AUTO VOLUM E.

3 Press the pushbutton under the desired

speed compensation.

Speed dependent volume compensation

95_U S_M 07.book Page 106 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

107Saab 9-5 Audio System

Sound system

The sound system is called harman/kar-

don® Sound System. Loudness is con-

trolled automatically by the audio system,

boosting the highest and lowest frequency

ranges to enhance the sound image when

the volume is set to a low level. Sound

reproduction is therefore excellent what-

ever the volume setting.

The 9-5 SportCombi has 8 speakers as

there is only one subwoofer in the luggage

compartment.

harman/kardon® Sound System

The harman/kardon® Sound System

system has 9 speakers: three mounted in

the instrument panel fascia (the center

speaker further enhances the sound

image), one in each door and two subwoof-

ers in the parcel shaft. The subwoofers

enhance reproduction of the lowest bass

notes.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 107 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

108 Saab 9-5 Audio System

Technical data

Specifications in accordance with EIA Interim Standard.

THD = Total Harmonic Distortion

Tone controls

Bass_____________ ±8 dB at 100 Hz

Treble ____________ ±8 dB at 16 kHz

Power output

harman/kardon®

Sound System __ 200 W

150 W at 1% THD

and 13.5 V

Radio module

Radio system ______ PLL frequency syn-

thesizer tuner.

Number of presets

FM/AM/XMTM 3_6 x 6

Frequency range

FM ___________ 87.7 - 107,9 MHz

AM ___________ 530 - 1710 kHz

Tuning steps

Automatic tuning _ FM 200 kHz

AM 10 kHz

Manual tuning ___ FM 200 kHz

AM 10 kHz

Frequency range (FM) 40 – 11000 Hz

±1 dB

Distortion (FM) _____ < 0.5%

CD player and

CD changer

1-bit system and 8 x

oversampling

Frequency range ___ 20 – 20000 Hz

±1 dB

Distortion _________ <0.005%

Dynamics _________ >85 dB

CD changer capacity 6 discs

95_U S_M 07.book Page 108 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

109Saab 9-5 Audio System

Antennas

The audio system has two antennas incor-

porated in the rear window: one for FM and

one for AM.

The XMTM Satellite Radio antenna 3 is

located on the roof of the vehicle. Keep this

antenna clear of snow and ice build up for

clear radio reception.

• Roof loads can negatively affect telecom-

munication, GPS reception and the per-

formance of the XMTM system 3.

• If sun film is fitted to the rear window, it

must be a pure-plastic variety to maintain

good radio reception. Ensure that the film

does not contain any metal.

Multipath propagation

Multipath propagation occurs when radio

waves from an FM transmitter are reflected

by a large building, or the like, causing them

to arrive slightly later than the direct waves.

This can create interference to radio recep-

tion. See also "Diversity antenna".

Diversity antenna 3

To improve radio reception when the topog-

raphy is a problem, a second FM antenna,

known as a diversity antenna, can be fitted

in the rear window. Consult a Saab dealer

for further information.

NOTICE

Refrain from placing hard or sharp

objects on the rear parcel shelf, to avoid

damaging the antenna leads.

IB4470

IB4471

95_U S_M 07.book Page 109 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

110 Saab 9-5 Audio System

Shadow effect

Because FM radio waves travel in straight

lines from the transmitter, a shadow effect

can occur when tall buildings or hills

obstruct the propagation path from the

transmitter to the car.

Cross modulation

If the radio is tuned to a weak transmitter in

the vicinity of a stronger one, the car’s

antennas will receive signals from both.

Such interference is apparent when the

unwanted broadcast can be heard faintly in

the background.

Radio waves, FM/AM

FM radio waves radiate in straight lines from

the transmitter. Because such waves do not

follow the curvature of the Earth, their

strength becomes weaker the further they

travel. That is why a large number of trans-

mitters is needed to provide good reception.

AM waves, on the other hand, are reflected

off the ionosphere, thus greatly extending

their range.

IB4472

IB4496

IB388

AMFM

95_U S_M 07.book Page 110 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

111Saab 9-5 Audio System

Sources of FM interference

Interference to FM reception can be caused

by the electrical systems in other vehicles,

particularly if the signal from the transmitter

is weak.

Sources of AM interference

AM reception is prone to interference, e.g.

from electrical systems in other vehicles,

high-tension power lines and lightning.

IB4473

IB4474

95_U S_M 07.book Page 111 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

112 Saab 9-5 Audio System

Error codes

The audio system has a built-in diagnostics

function. If a fault is detected, a error code

is generated to help workshop technicians

to diagnose the fault. Below are the codes

for some faults that you might be able to rec-

tify yourself.

Security lock

The audio system is equipped with an elec-

tronic security lock. The special code is

unique to the car in which the audio system

is fitted.

Each time the audio system is switched on,

a check is made to ensure that the code is

correct. If not, the following will appear on

the display: Locked

If the audio system is to be transferred to

another car (Saab 9-5), a Saab dealer must

be contacted to provide the right code for

the audio system.

NOTICE

Proceed with care if rectifying a fault. If in

doubt, contact a workshop. We recom-

mend that you contact an authorized

Saab dealer.

Error code Possible cause

Check CD • CD is dirty, scratched,

loaded wrong-side-up

or defective.

• The CD may be

improperly burned.

WARNING

The CD player/CD changer is classified

as Class 1 laser equipment.

• Service and repair work must only be

carried out by authorized technicians.

• If the casing is damaged, hazardous

laser radiation can occur.

NOTICE

All work on the audio system must be car-

ried out by a workshop. We recommend

that you contact an authorized Saab

dealer.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 112 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

113Interior equipment and trunk

Steering wheel

adjustment__________ 114

Electric windows______ 115

Rearview mirrors______ 116

Moonroof 3__________ 123

Interior lighting _______ 124

Sun visors ___________ 125

Power Outlet 3_______ 126

Glove compartment ___ 126

Cup holders__________ 128

Trunk _______________ 129

IB394

Interior equipment and trunk

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,

market specification, options or accessories).

95_U S_M 07.book Page 113 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

114 Interior equipment and trunk

Steering wheel

adjustment

Fore-and-aft and tilt adjustment of the steer-

ing wheel is possible.

Pull down the lever fully until you hear a

click. Move the steering wheel to the desired

position and then raise the lever. The lever

should lock with a click.

Make sure that the lever is fully locked

before driving off.

Horn

The horn is sounded by pressing the central

part of the steering wheel. Press closest to

the steering wheel rim.

WARNING

Never adjust the steering wheel unless

the car is stationary.

IB3868

To adjust the steering wheel

IB3869

95_U S_M 07.book Page 114 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

115Interior equipment and trunk

Electric windows

The electric motors of the front windows are

equipped with overload protection (inte-

grated thermal protection). This protection

operates when the windows are wound

down automatically (switch pressed fully

down).

To open:

Front windows: press the front of the switch

Rear windows: Press the back of the switch.

The switches for the front windows have a

third position for automatic opening of the

window. Press the switch fully down to lower

the window completely.

To cancel automatic lowering of the win-

dow, lift the switch briefly.

To close:

Front windows: Lift the front of the switch.

Rear windows: Lift the back of the switch.

The actuating motor will be switched off

automatically when the window is fully

closed or when the switch is released.

WARNING

Bear in mind the pinch hazard when the

side windows are being wound up.

•Always remove the ignition key when

you leave the car. This prevents per-

sonal injury caused by the electric win-

dows, for example, due to children

playing.

• The person operating the electric win-

dows is responsible for ensuring that

no one, especially children, has their

head, hands or fingers in the window

openings, before raising the windows.

Raising the windows could otherwise

cause serious or fatal injuries.

• Do not extend your arm, head etc. out

of an open window while driving.

IB3231

1 Window switches

2 Switch for rendering rear door window switches inoperative

95_U S_M 07.book Page 115 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

116 Interior equipment and trunk

Child safety: rear windows

(ON/OFF)

The window switches on the rear doors can

be rendered inoperative by the ON/OFF

switch in the panel on the center console.

When the switch is ON, the rear side win-

dows can be operated by the switch on each

rear door. The switch’s back lighting will be

activated.

When the switch is OFF, the rear side win-

dows can only be operated from the panel

on the center console. When off, the

switch’s back lighting will also be switched

off.

Rearview mirrors

Door mirrors

The door mirrors may have an auto dimming

function 3 and the passenger side door

mirror is of the wide-angle ‘‘aspheric” type.

IB445

Switch for rear side window

95_U S_M 07.book Page 116 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

117Interior equipment and trunk

The adjusting switch is on the driver’s door.

If the car is equipped with a programmable

driver’s seat, the settings of the door mirrors

can also be stored in the preset buttons for

the seat (see page 20).

The door mirrors are designed to fold back

if knocked. They can also be fully retracted

for parking in tight spaces, such as on the

car deck of a ferry. Remember to fold them

out again before driving off.

Cars equipped with a programmable

driver’s seat 3 also have the ability to angle

the passenger’s mirror down when revers-

ing, e.g. for a better view of the curb.

1 Select reverse.

2 Press the tiny button adjacent to the

doormirror switch to tilt the mirror. The

mirror will be reset automatically when

reverse gear is deselected.

The mirror glass can also be adjusted man-

ually by gently pressing the glass in the

desired direction.

The mirrors are heated, and the heating

comes on and goes off with the rear-window

heater.

NOTICE

The door mirrors should be fully retracted

before the car enters an automatic car

wash.

Door mirror folded in

IB568

Button for angling passenger’s mirror

down when reversing

Adjusting the door mirrors

1 Select mirror

2 Use touch pad to adjust mirror

95_U S_M 07.book Page 117 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

118 Interior equipment and trunk

Rearview mirror

The rearview mirror has day/night positions

that can be selected by means of a knob

beneath the mirror. Adjust the mirror in day

position.

Interior rearview auto-dimming

mirror with garage door opener,

and digital compass 3

Retain your original garage door transmitter

for future programming procedures (i.e.,

new vehicle purchase). It is also suggested

that upon the sale of the vehicle, the pro-

grammed garage opener buttons be erased

for security purposes.

WARNING

Make sure that people and objects are out

of the way of a moving door or gate to pre-

vent potential harm or damage.

When programming the garage opener,

you may be operating a garage door or

gate operator. Therefore it is advised to

park outside of the garage.

Do not use the garage opener with any

garage door opener that lacks the safety

stop and reverse feature as required by

federal safety standards. (This includes

any garage door opener model manufac-

tured before April 1, 1982.). A garage

door opener which cannot detect an

object, signalling the door to stop and

reverse, does not meet current federal

safety standards. Using a garage door

opener without these features increases

risk of serious injury or death.

Rearview mirror

1 Day position

2 Night position

Buttons for garage opener and compass

1-3 Garage opener

4 LED

5 Compass/auto dimming ON/OFF

6 Compass bearing

95_U S_M 07.book Page 118 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

119Interior equipment and trunk

Preparations for first-time programming

Before programming the garage opener for

the first time, you must delete any factory

codes.

Press and hold the two outer buttons until

the indicator light begins to flash-after

20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do not

hold for longer that 30 seconds. The garage

opener is now in the train (or learning) mode

and can be programmed at any time begin-

ning with "Programming" - step 2.

Programming

The garage opener can record and store the

frequencies of three different remote con-

trols.

The battery in the remote control should be

fairly new for programming to work well.

Do not repeat "Programming" - step two

to train additional devices to a second or

third button. Begin with "Programming" -

step three.

1 Turn the ignition ON.

2 Press and hold the two outer buttons

(buttons one and three) - releasing only

when the indicator light begins to flash

(after 20 seconds). Do not hold the but-

tons for longer than 30 seconds and do

not repeat step two to program a

second and/or third hand-held transmit-

ter to the remaining two buttons.

3 Position the end of your hand-held trans-

mitter 1-3 inches (5-14 cm) away from

the button you wish to program while

keeping the indicator light in view. The

transmitter should face the mirror from

below or left side of the mirror.

4 Simultaneously press and hold both the

chosen and hand-held transmitter but-

tons. Do not release the buttons until

step 5 has been completed.

Note: Some gate operators and garage

door openers may require you to replace

this Programming Step 4 with procedures

noted in the "Gate Operator / Canadian Pro-

gramming" section.

5 After the indicator light changes from a

slow to a rapidly blinking light, release

both the mirror and hand-held transmit-

ter buttons.

6 Press and hold the just-trained button

and observe the indicator light.

If the indicator light stays on con-

stantly, programming is complete

and your device should activate when

the button is pressed and released.

Note: To program the remaining two but-

tons, begin with "Programming" - step

three. Do not repeat step two.

If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two

seconds and then turns to a constant

light continue with "Programming"

steps 7-9 to complete the programming of

a rolling code equipped device (most com-

monly a garage door opener).

7 At the garage door opener receiver

(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate

the "learn" or "smart" button. This can

usually

be found where the hanging

antenna wire is attached to the

motor-head unit.

8 Firmly press and release the "learn" or

"smart" button. (The name and color of

the button may vary by manufacturer.)

Note: There are 30 seconds in which to ini-

tiate step nine.

9 Return to the vehicle and firmly press,

hold for two seconds and release the

programmed button. Repeat the

"press/hold/release" sequence a

second time, and, depending on the

brand of the garage door opener (or

other rolling code equipped device),

repeat this sequence a third time to com-

plete the programming process.

The garage opener should now activate

your rolling code equipped device.

Note: To program the remaining two but-

tons, begin with "Programming" -

step

three

. Do not repeat step two.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 119 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

120 Interior equipment and trunk

Gate Operator / Canadian Programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require

transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit)

after several seconds of transmission -

which may not be long enough for the

garage opener to pick up the signal during

programming. Similar to this Canadian law,

some U.S. gate operators are designed to

"time-out" in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-

culties programming a gate operator by

using the "Programming" procedures

(regardless of where you live), replace

"Programming " step 4 with the following:

Note: If programming a garage door opener

or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the

device during the "cycling" process to pre-

vent possible overheating.

Continue to press and hold the button while

you press and release - every two sec-

onds ("cycle") your hand-held transmitter

until the frequency signal has successfully

been accepted by the garage opener. (The

indicator light will flash slowly and then rap-

idly.)

Proceed with "Programming" step five to

complete.

Reprogramming a single button

To program a device to the garage opener

using a button previously trained, follow

these steps:

1 Press and hold the desired button. DO

NOT release the button.

2 The indicator light will begin to flash after

20 seconds. Without releasing the but-

ton, proceed with "Programming" -

step 3.

Erasing the three buttons

To erase programming from the three but-

tons (individual buttons cannot be erased

but can be "reprogrammed" as outlined

below), follow the step noted:

• Press and hold the two outer buttons until

the indicator light begins to flash-after

20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do

not hold for longer that 30 seconds. The

garage opener is now in the train (or learn-

ing) mode and can be programmed at any

time beginning with "Programming" -

step 3.

NOTICE

Switch off the power supply to the garage

door or gate (or park the car beyond the

range of the remote control) while pro-

gramming using the "cycling" method to

prevent damaging the electrical motor.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 120 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

121Interior equipment and trunk

Opening a garage door

To operate, simply press and release the

programmed button. Activation will now

occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door

opener, gate operator, security system,

entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.).

For convenience, the hand-held transmitter

of the device may also be used at any time.

Rearview auto-dimming

mirrors 3

The autodimming is activated and deacti-

vated with a short push on button 2.

If the mirror is equipped with Garage Door

Opener (option) the letter 1 is displayed on

compass bearing display briefly when auto

dimming is activated. When deactivating

the letter 0 is displayed.

The interior rearview mirror has two sen-

sors, one forward-facing and one rear-fac-

ing. They also activate and deactivate the

auto dimming feature on door mirrors.

The system is activated when the for-

ward-facing sensor detects that it is dark

outside and the rear-facing sensor detects.

For example, if the car following has not

dimmed its headlights. The rearview mirrors

are then darkened to prevent the strong light

source from dazzling the driver. This dark-

ening is stepless.

The mirrors return to their normal states

when the strong light source diminishes.

The auto dimming function can be turned

OFF with the switch on the lower edge of the

rear-view mirror.

NOTE

Towing a trailer can cause the system to

malfunction, as the rear-facing sensor may

sense light from the trailer.

NOTICE

Switch off the power supply to the garage

door or gate (or park the car beyond the

range of the remote control) while pro-

gramming using the "cycling" method to

prevent damaging the electrical motor.

1 Forward-facing sensor

2 ON/OFF switch, auto dimming function

3 Rear-facing sensor

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)

this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)

must accept any interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the

manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate

the equipment.

Canada only:

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)

this device may not cause interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired operation of this device.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 121 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

122 Interior equipment and trunk

Compass

The compass is integrated in the rearview

mirror. The compass bearing is displayed in

the top right-hand corner of the mirror and is

updated every other second. The compass

displays the car’s direction of travel: N, NE,

E, etc.

Switch the compass display on and off by

pressing button 5 for 3 seconds.

Changing zones

The earth’s magnetic fields vary depending

on one’s position on the globe. If you drive

your car from one magnetic zone to another

the compass setting will need to be changed

to ensure a correct bearing.

1 Study the illustrations to determine the

correct zone.

2 Press and hold button 5 until "ZONE" is

shown in the display on the mirror

(6 seconds). The zone number setting

now is also shown.

3 Press button 5 repeatedly to change the

zone number. There are 15 zones from

which to choose. Once the correct zone

is selected, release the button and wait

4 seconds. The compass will now dis-

play the bearing.

Calibration

Calibration is performed automatically

during travel. If an accessory, such as a

mobile phone, is fitted and it can be

assumed that the compass is affected, the

compass may need to be calibrated manu-

ally.

1 Press and hold button 5 until "CAL" and

the compass bearing are displayed

(approx. 9 seconds).

2 Drive in circles (max. 5 mph/8 km/h) or

drive as normal until "CAL" is no longer

displayed.

Compass zones in USCompass zones in Canada

95_U S_M 07.book Page 122 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

123Interior equipment and trunk

Moonroof 3

The moonroof is operated by the switch on

the overhead panel above the rearview mir-

ror. The moonroof can be opened partially

or fully.

To open:

• Slide the control towards the rear to open

the moonroof to the comfort position.

To open it fully, slide the control back a

second time. Press the control to stop it

earlier.

To close:

• Slide the control forwards until the moon-

roof is closed.

Ventilation position

• Press the middle of the control (when

moonroof closed).

• To close: slide the control forwards.

To fully open the moonroof from the ventila-

tion position, slide the control back.

The moonroof incorporates an interior,

manual, sliding sun blind.

If the car is newly waxed, the moonroof may

creak when opened to the ventilation posi-

tion or when driving with the moonroof

closed. The sound comes from the area

where the front edge of the moonroof meets

the metal roof. Open the moonroof fully and,

using washer fluid, clean the seal on the

leading edge of the moonroof and the

painted surface against which this seals

when the moonroof is closed.

WARNING

Bear in mind the pinch hazard when clos-

ing the moonroof.

•Always remove the ignition key when

you leave the car. This prevents per-

sonal injury caused by the electric

moonroof, for example, due to chil-

dren playing.

• The person operating the electric

moonroof is responsible for ensuring

that no one, especially children, has

their head, hands or fingers in the

opening, before closing the moonroof.

Operating the moonroof could other-

wise cause serious or fatal injuries.

• Do not extend your arm, head etc. out

of an open moonroof while driving.

IB430

Moonroof control

1 To open

2 To close

3 Ventilation position

95_U S_M 07.book Page 123 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

124 Interior equipment and trunk

Emergency operation of

moonroof

In an emergency (e.g. if there is an electrical

failure) the moonroof can be operated by a

screwdriver. Remove the cover at the front

of the moonroof opening, insert a screw-

driver in the groove, and rotate.

Rotate counterclockwise to close moonroof.

Interior lighting

The interior lighting consists of one dome

light in the front and one in the back, a

map-reading light in the front, two reading

lights in the back, floor courtesy lights in the

front (in some model variants) and door

courtesy lights on all doors.

The courtesy lights come on automatically

when the respective door is opened. Each

reading light has its own switch adjacent to

the lamp.

The switch for the dome lights is on the front

overhead panel. When the switch is in the

mid-position (door-activated), the interior

lighting will come on:

• When the car is unlocked from the out-

side.

• When any door is opened.

• When the ignition key is withdrawn from

the ignition switch.

Lighting goes out 30 seconds after the

doors have been closed or:

• when the ignition is switched ON, pro-

vided that the cabin lighting control is in

the center position

• when the car is locked with the remote

control.

IB431

Manual operation of moonroof

IB357

1 Interior lighting on continuously

2 Lighting comes on when a door is opened

3 Lighting always off

95_U S_M 07.book Page 124 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

125Interior equipment and trunk

There is also a light in the sun visors. The

light comes on when the cover over the

vanity mirror is opened.

When the ignition is OFF, if a door has been

left open for 20 minutes, the interior lighting

will be switched off automatically to save the

battery.

Luggage-compartment lighting

The luggage-compartment lighting comes

on automatically when the trunk is opened

and goes out when the trunk is closed.

The lighting will also be switched off auto-

matically after 20 minutes if the trunk has

been left open.

Sun visors

If the car is equipped with double sun visors.

One section of the visor can be indepen-

dently pivoted to the side window.

A vanity mirror is provided on the back of the

sun visors. The vanity mirrors are illumi-

nated when the cover is raised.

IB358

1 Reading lights

2 Dome light

IB1180

Sun visor

95_U S_M 07.book Page 125 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

126 Interior equipment and trunk

Power Outlet 3

You can use the electrical socket to charge

a mobile phone, for example.

Glove compartment

The glove compartment can be cooled by

the air conditioning (ACC) system. Cold air

can be directed to the glove compartment

for keeping drinks cool, etc.

Slide the cover to open/close the air inlet.

Additional storage facilities are provided

(see next page).

WARNING

The maximum combined load for the two

power outlets is 240 W (20 A).

WARNING

The glove compartment must be closed

while travelling. An open glove compart-

ment door could cause leg injuries in the

event of a crash.

IB1286

Sliding cover in glove compartment to

admit cold air

95_U S_M 07.book Page 126 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

127Interior equipment and trunk

IB436

IB437

IB439

IB441

IB438

On the back of the front seats

Center armrest for rear seat

On leading edge of front seats

Console between front seats

In the doors

95_U S_M 07.book Page 127 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

128 Interior equipment and trunk

Cup holders

Cup holders are provided in the instrument

panel fascia, in the center console compart-

ment between the front seats, and in the

rear-seat armrest (certain variants only).

To access the cup holder in the instrument

panel, press the symbol and release.

To access the cup holder in the rear seat

armrest, lower the armrest and press the

front edge of the holder. Close in the same

way.

The number of cup holders provided may

vary between models.

WARNING

• The cup holder should not be used to

hold cups made of china, glass or hard

plastic as these can cause injury in the

event of a crash.

• Use only for paper cups or aluminium

cans.

• Avoid spillage, particularly of hot

drinks.

• Avoid putting oversized cups in the

cup holder.

NOTICE

Take care not to spill any liquid on the

audio system, ignition switch or the like

when using the cup holders. Soft drinks in

particular can cause malfunction.

IB1153

Cup holder in center console

IB443

Cup holder in rear armrest

Press the edge to open/close.

IB444

Cup holder in fascia

1 Press symbol to open

2 Lift bottom to close

95_U S_M 07.book Page 128 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

129 Interior equipment and trunk

Trunk

Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Sedan

The rear seat is split and the two sections can be folded indepen-

dently. Folding down of the rear seat is easier if the front seats are

not all the way back, and the rear head restraints are folded down.

1 Raise the rear seat cushions by pulling the loop located between

the cushion and the backrest.

2 Tip the seat cushion forward.

3 Press the button adjacent to the respective backrest to release it.

4 Fold down the backrest.

WARNING

• Never leave a child or animal unattended in the car. During

sunny weather the temperature in the passenger and luggage

compartments can climb to 158–176°F (70–80°C). Small chil-

dren are very susceptible to heat stroke.

• Rear-seat passengers should always ensure that the head

restraint is raised and in proper position for the seats to be

occupied.

• Keep hands well clear of all moving parts.

• Never place heavy objects on the rear window shelf. There is

always a danger of loose objects flying about and causing

injury if the car should brake suddenly or be involved in a

crash.

• Before folding up the backrest, hang the outer safety belts

onto the hook on the respective courtesy handle to prevent

them from becoming trapped.

• Check that the seatbelt locks do not get trapped under the

seat cushions when these are raised back up.

• Make sure that the backrest is locked when it is restored to an

upright position. Check that the back rest release button (3) is

flush with the surround before entering the rear seat. This indi-

cates that the backrest is locked.

IB459

1 2

95_U S_M 07.book Page 129 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

130Interior equipment and trunk

WARNING

• Place heavy items closest to the backrest and stow smaller

and lighter items on top.

•Never overload the cargo net 3. If the elastic breaks this may

cause personal injury. Do not use a cargo net that shows signs

of wear.

• Secure heavy and bulky items using the tie down points

provided in the trunk. This will avert the danger of luggage

flying around if the car should brake suddenly or be involved

in a crash (see page 131).

• Secure small items if the backrest is folded down or the

load-through hatch is open. Small items can also be thrown

around inside the car and cause personal injury.

• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its

handling characteristics (see page 258).

• Make sure that the seat cushions and backrests are properly

secured when folding them back to their normal position.

Check that the button (item 3 on page 129) is flush with the

surround before entering the back seat.

The tail pipe of the exhaust system can become very hot during

driving. Bear this in mind when loading and unloading the car so

that children, for example, do not burn themselves.

IB4140 IB461

Outer safety belt hooked onto courtesy handle

95_U S_M 07.book Page 130 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

131 Interior equipment and trunk

Trunk pass-through hatch

A trunk pass-through hatch is incorporated in the rear seat backrest

to enable long, narrow items to be carried inside the car.

Items should not weigh more than 33 lbs. (15 kg) nor be more than

2 yards (2 metres) in length. See the label on the hatch.

1 Fold down the armrest.

2 Raise the hatch by lifting the handle.

Before loading or unloading long items, switch off the engine and

apply the parkingbrake. This averts the danger of the car moving off

suddenly if a long item were to knock the gear or selector lever into

gear.

Tie Downs

The tie downs for securing the load are fitted inside the trunk. Place

the load as far in as possible.

WARNING

• Anchor the load securely (e.g. using middle safety belt) to

avoid danger of injury resulting from displacement of load on

hard braking.

• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its

handling characteristics (see page 258).

IB463

IB4141

95_U S_M 07.book Page 131 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

132Interior equipment and trunk

Folding the rear seat, 9-5 SportCombi

Both the narrow and wide sections of the rear seat can be folded

separately. Folding is facilitated if the front seats are not located too

far back. The wide section cannot be folded separately if a cargo net

(accessory) is mounted on the rear of the backrest.

1 Make sure that the head restraint is in the down position. For

height adjustment refer to page 21.

2 Put the safety belts for the outer seat places in their respective

belt clips, which are located near the backrest (see illustration).

3 Raise the rear seat cushions by pulling the loop located between

the cushion and the backrest.

4 Fold the narrow section (right) of the backrest forward by raising

the opening handle on the right-hand side.

5 Fold the wide section of the backrest forward in the

corresponding manner.

6 Adjust the front seats for optimal driving/passenger comfort.

NOTICE

The safety belts for the outer seating positions should be put in

their respective belt clips near the backrest to prevent them from

being pinched when the rear seat is raised to the upright position.

IB1211

IB3127

Safety belt located in its belt clip

95_U S_M 07.book Page 132 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

133 Interior equipment and trunk

Parcel shelf, 9-5 SportCombi

Fold the parcel shelf as follows:

1 Press the rear edge of the shelf downwards and forwards.

2 Continue pressing the folded section forward until it is folded over

the front section.

Extend the parcel shelf as follows:

1 Hold the rear edge of the shelf and pull it back.

2 The shelf rests on a track located beneath the rear side windows.

Make sure that the rear corner fits in the recess. Otherwise it will

not lie flat.

Alternative location of the parcel shelf if this is removed:

• Folded up on the floor at the rear of the luggage compartment.

• On its end on the floor behind the front seat backrest.

WARNING

• Do not travel in the back seat without ensuring that the head

restraint is set at a suitable height for the seats to be occupied.

• Never allow anyone to sit on a folded backrest.

• Always be aware of the risk of pinching when handling moving

parts of the seating.

• Never place heavy objects on the parcel shelf. There is always

a danger of loose objects flying about and causing injury if the

car should brake suddenly or be involved in a crash.

• Make sure that the backrests are locked when they are folded

back upright. Check that the two red warning-indication flags

are fully down. This indicates that the backrests are locked.

• Check that the safety belt lock is not trapped under the seat

cushions when these are raised back up.

• Never leave a child or animal unattended in the car. During

sunny weather the temperature in the passenger and luggage

compartments can climb to 158–176°F (70–80°C). Small chil-

dren are very susceptible to heat stroke.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 133 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

134Interior equipment and trunk

Folding the narrow section of the backrest

The folding is facilitated if the front seat is not too far back.

1 Make sure that the head restraint is in the down position. For

height adjustment refer to page 21.

2 Put the safety belt in the belt clip near the backrest.

3 Raise the rear seat cushion by pulling the loop located at the rear

of the cushion.

4 Fold the narrow section (right) of the backrest forward by raising

the opening handle.

5 Adjust the front seat for optimal passenger comfort.

NOTICE

The safety belts for the outer seating positions should be put in

their respective belt clips near the back rest to prevent them being

pinched when the rear seat is raised to the upright position, see

illustration page 132.

IB3128

95_U S_M 07.book Page 134 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

135Interior equipment and trunk

Load anchoring

Driving with the trunk lid/tailgate open,

see page 183.

WARNING

• Put heavy loads as low down and as

far forward as possible in the luggage

compartment, i.e. against the back of

the rear seat.

•Never overload the cargo net 3. If the

elastic breaks this may cause personal

injury. Do not use a cargo net that

shows signs of wear.

• Never stack cargo so high that any part

of the cargo lies above the edge of the

backrest, if a cargo guard 3 is not

being used.

• Always tie down the cargo so that it

cannot be thrown forward during

heavy braking or in the event of a

crash.

• Unsecured and heavy cargo can

increase the risk of injury during hard

braking, sudden avoidance maneu-

vers and in the event of a crash.

• For the best load anchoring, use the

special cargo tie down eye and load

straps 3.

• Load the cargo tie down eyes evenly.

Never attach more than one strap to

each tie down eye.

• Provide protection on sharp edges to

prevent damage to the load straps.

• Never use the elastic floor net 3 and

elastic side net (accessory) when the

rear seat is folded down. These nets

are only intended to keep light objects

tidy, not for the anchoring of loads.

• If possible, avoid having the rear seat

folded down when driving with a heavy

load because the anchoring possibili-

ties are restricted when the rear seat is

in this position. That the rear seat is

in the upright position is a basic

requirement for protection against

cargo displacement in the event of

a crash.

• Cargo can intrude into the passenger

compartment during a sudden stop or

front crash if the outer safety belts are

not fastened. Check that the two red

warning-indication flags are fully

down. This shows that the backrests

are locked.

WARNING

• Match the speed and driving style

according to how the car is loaded.

The driving characteristics of the car

can be affected because the center of

gravity is altered when there is a cargo

in the luggage compartment.

• An object weighing 55 lbs. (25 kg) cor-

responds to a weight of 2200 lbs.

(1000 kg) in a head on crash at

32 mph (50 km/h).

• Adjust the car’s load (passengers and

luggage) so that the gross vehicle

weight or the axle weight is not

exceeded, see page 258.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 135 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

136 Interior equipment and trunk

On the floor of the luggage compartment

there may be two longitudinal aluminium

rails (CargoTracks™) where accessory

cargo tie down eye can be mounted.

Fitting a lashing eye:

1 Hold it between your forefinger and

middle finger with the ring up.

2 Press down the spring center section

with your thumb.

3 Insert the center section into one of the

holes and move the lashing eye forward

or back slightly to fit it into the middle of

the recess in the rail.

4 Release it.

5 Check that the lashing eye is firmly fitted

by pulling on it.

Items for load anchoring:

• Cargo tie down eye 3.

• Special load straps 3.

Items to keep light objects tidy 3:

• Elastic floor cargo net 3.

• Elastic side cargo net for the right-hand

side of the luggage compartment 3.

The elastic nets may only be used to keep

light objects tidy, not for anchoring.

The floor net should be attached to the

cargo tie down eye that are mounted on the

CargoTracks™. Place the tie down eyes as

far forward and as far back as possible on

the CargoTracks™.

The side netting should be attached to the

two tie down eyes which are included in the

accessory kit and to two of the eyes

mounted on the right-hand CargoTrack™

on the floor.

The cargo tie down eyes, load straps and

elastic nets are stored in the two floor lock-

ers on the right- and left-hand side of the

luggage compartment. The lockers are

opened by lifting the respective fabric loop.

NOTICE

Do not place any objects so that the

demisting and antenna elements on the

inside of the window could be damaged.

IB4092

Cargo tie down eye

mounted on the lon-

gitudinal rails

IB1216

Example of cargo anchoring

IB1215

Elastic cargo net for lighter objects.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 136 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

137Interior equipment and trunk

Cargo net 3

Install the net behind the rear seat backrest.

1 Remove the rearmost covers from the

roof.

2 Fasten the attachments at the top of the

net to the two attachment points in the

roof.

3 Secure a lashing eye furthest forward on

each of the CargoTracks (see previous

page). Attach the hooks on the net to

these eyes. Tension the straps.

You can also install the cargo net directly

behind the front seats when the rear seats

are folded.

1 Remove the front covers from the roof.

2 Fasten the attachments at the top of the

net to the two attachment points in the

roof.

3 Wrap each strap around the tube run-

ning under the rear edge of each front

seat and attach the hook to the eye on

the strap.

WARNING

The cargo in the luggage compartment

must be anchored properly, even if the

cargo net is correctly in position. The only

purpose of the net is to prevent light

objects from being thrown about in the

cabin during heavy braking or in the event

of a crash.

IB1217

Cover over the fixing point for the cargo

net

IB1218

Attaching the cargo net to the roof

IB4091

Hook attached to a lashing eye

95_U S_M 07.book Page 137 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

138 Interior equipment and trunk

Storage tray 3 under luggage

compartment floor,

9-5 SportCombi

Secure the luggage compartment floor in

the open position using the hook on the

underside of the floor. The storage tray must

be located under the luggage compartment

floor. The cargo net can be stored here

when not in use for example.

Maximum recommended weight on the

storage tray is 22 lbs. (10 kg).

Trunk Release Handle

There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release

handle located inside the trunk on the latch.

This handle will glow following exposure to

light. Pull the release handle down to open

the trunk from the inside.

NOTICE

The trunk release handle was not

designed to be used to tie down the trunk

lid or as a an anchor point when securing

items in the trunk. Improper use of the

trunk release could damage it.

IB1833

Trunk Release Handle

IB4093

95_U S_M 07.book Page 138 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

139Starting and driving

IB3878

Starting and driving

Ignition switch ________ 140

Starting the engine ____ 141

Important considerations

for driving___________ 144

Refueling ____________ 146

Engine Break-In Period_ 150

Gear changing ________ 150

Cruise control ________ 159

Braking______________ 160

Electronic Stability

Program (ESP®)______ 163

Economical motoring __ 170

Driving in cold weather_ 172

Driving in hot weather _ 173

Towing a trailer 3_____ 174

Driving with a roof rack

load________________ 179

Driving at night _______ 181

Driving with a load ____ 181

Driving with a spare

wheel fitted _________ 183

Driving with the trunk

lid/tailgate open______ 183

Driving in deep water __ 183

Towing the car________ 183

Jump starting ________ 186

Saab Parking

Assistance 3________ 168

Parking brake ________ 165

Parking______________ 165

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,

market specification, options or accessories).

95_U S_M 07.book Page 139 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

140 Starting and driving

Ignition switch

The combined ignition switch and

gear-lever lock is located in the center con-

sole between the front seats. The ignition

key can only be removed when reverse is

engaged (automatic transmission: selector

in ”P” position).

The key fits all the locks on the car. The key

number is specified on the small plastic

strap that comes with the keys when the car

is delivered. Keep a note of the key number

in a safe place, as you will need to quote it if

ordering a replacement key.

see also page 259.

Use only the electrical trailer hitch socket

provided in the trailer hitch kit. 3

Saab recommends:

• Use a Saab original hitch kit attachment

which is designed and tested by Saab.

• Consult your Saab dealer regarding the

appropriate hitch kit for your car.

If the car has a 13-pin genuine Saab electri-

cal socket, the trailer/caravan can be equip-

ped with rear fog lamp and reversing lamps.

The caravan can also have interior and

exterior lighting when the car’s ignition is off.

Do not put a load on the battery for so

long that it becomes discharged and the

car cannot be started.

There is also access to power in the caravan

during a journey, the caravan battery can be

charged for example.

WARNING

• Exercise care when opening the hood

if the engine is overheated. Never

remove the expansion tank cap com-

pletely when the engine is hot.

• The cooling system is pressurized -

hot coolant and vapor can escape.

These can cause injury to your eyes

and burns. Open the cap slowly to

release the pressure before

removing it.

WARNING

• When towing a trailer, do not attempt

to negotiate a hill having a gradient in

excess of 15 %. The weight distribu-

tion over the front wheels of the car will

be insufficient to prevent wheelspin,

making further progress impossible.

• In addition, the parking brake may not

always be able to hold the car and

trailer securely, with the result that the

wheels can start to slide downhill.

• Always apply the trailer’s parking-

brake when unhitching it. There is oth-

erwise a risk of personal injury or

damage to the bumper should the

trailer start to roll.

NOTICE

Only use a towbar that has been appro-

ved for your car. We recommend that you

entrust towbar installation to an authori-

zed Saab workshop, which can also pro-

vide important information such as trailer

weight. Your authorized Saab workshop

has information on how the towbar is to be

installed and whether other measures

must be undertaken that could affect the

cooling system or other equipment.

We recommend that you consult an

authorized Saab dealer for guidance on

how to connect the trailer hitch electrical

system.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 174 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

175Starting and driving

Trailer weight

Maximum recommended trailer weights for

different gradients, with a view to comfort

and drivability for manual and automatic

cars, are shown on the drawing.

Make sure you are familiar with the law

regarding speed limits for towing, maxi-

mum trailer weights, trailer-braking

requirements, and also any special

driving-license provisions

(see also page 259).

The specified trailer weights and gradients

assume that the journey starts at the hill and

therefore apply only to short periods.

Recommendations for driving in hilly

terrain

The following time limits are based on the

capacity of the cooling system in warm

weather, i.e. approximately 86°F (30°C).

The following time limits are based on the

capacity of the cooling system in hot

weather, i.e. approximately 104°F (40°C).

Gradient

of hill, %

Maximum

trailer weight,

lbs. (kg)

Maximum dura-

tion, minutes

6–7 3300 (1500) unlimited

8–9 3300 (1500) 15 max

10–15 1870 (850) 15 max

Gradient

of hill, %

Maximum

trailer weight,

lbs. (kg)

Maximum dura-

tion, minutes

6–7 2000 (900) unlimited

8–9 2000 (900) 15 max

10–15 1000 (450) 15 max.

Maximum recommended trailer weights

for different gradients

95_U S_M 07.book Page 175 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

176 Starting and driving

When negotiating long hills, bear the follow-

ing important considerations in mind:

• Use Normal mode when driving with a

caravan or trailer on hilly roads. The

adaptive gear change pattern function will

prevent the transmission overheating.

• Rises in coolant temperature are indi-

cated by the temperature gauge in the

main instrument panel.

Recommendations for cars with

automatic transmission

Rises in coolant temperature are indicated

by the temperature gauge in the main instru-

ment panel.

The following steps are taken in order as the

temperature of the engine increases:

• Gear change pattern is altered.

• A/C compressor is switched off.

• Engine torque is reduced.

The following message will be displayed on

the SID if the transmission fluid becomes

too hot:

“Gearbox too hot.

Make a safe stop.

If this message appears, stop the car as

soon as it is safe to do so and allow the

engine to idle until the message has gone

out. The selector lever should be in

position P.

When continuing your journey, select

manual mode and a gear in which the

engine speed is about 3,000 rpm until the

incline eases (see page 157).

WARNING

Remember to use the braking effect of the

engine (position D or L) when you are

descending long or steep hills to spare

the brakes.

Brake failure can result from overheated

brakes!

95_U S_M 07.book Page 176 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

177Starting and driving

Recommendations for cars with manual

gearbox

Rises in coolant temperature are indicated

by the temperature gauge in the main instru-

ment panel.

The following steps are taken in order as the

temperature of the engine increases:

• A/C compressor is switched off.

• engine torque is reduced.

When continuing your journey, select a gear

in which the engine speed is about

3,000 rpm until the incline eases.

Driving considerations

Always take extra care when towing a

trailer, as the car’s handling will be different

and its braking effect reduced. The trailer’s

braking system and suspension also have a

considerable effect on these characteris-

tics, see also ”Driving with a load” page 181.

If the car has automatic transmission, select

position D when ascending steep hills. This

ensures that the adaptive gear change pat-

terns are operational, see page 158. Use

position D or L for steep descents.

Checks before driving

Make sure that the car and camper or trailer

are in good working order. This is essential

since towing a camper or trailer increases

the strain on the car.

• Check and if necessary adjust the tire

pressure of the car and camper or trailer.

• Make sure all wheel bolts are properly

tightened.

• Make sure that the equipment joining the

car and camper or trailer is properly

secured and adjusted.

• Make sure the camper or trailer’s electri-

cal cable is properly connected and is not

so long that it drags along the ground.

Also, make sure the cable is not too short

and risks breaking when turning a corner.

• Check all bulbs.

• Check the car and camper or trailer

brakes.

• Make sure that all items on or in the cara-

van or trailer are properly secured.

• Make sure that the camper or trailer’s

jockey wheel is raised and locked.

• Check the distribution of the load so that

the car and camper or trailer are well bal-

anced.

• Check that the rearview mirrors provide

the best possible rearward vision.

• Make sure the camper or trailer’s safety

cable is correctly attached.

WARNING

Utilize the braking effect of the engine

(1st, 2nd or 3rd gear) when you are

descending long or steep hills to spare

the brakes.

Brake failure can result from overheated

brakes!

NOTICE

If the ”Automatic transmission 3, fault

indicator” indicator comes on, cease

towing until the problem has been recti-

fied.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 177 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

178 Starting and driving

Trailer hitch load

The weight distribution on the trailer makes

a lot of difference to the handling properties

of the car and trailer combination. As

regards single-axle trailers, whenever pos-

sible, concentrate the load over the wheels

and keep it as low as possible.

The trailer should be loaded so that the

maximum load on the towbar ball is 5 % to

7 % of the trailer weight with a maximum

permissible tongue weight of 110–165 lbs.

(50–75 kg).

Note that this load must be added to the total

load for the car. If this now exceeds the

specified load capacity, the load in the lug-

gage compartment will have to be reduced

by a corresponding amount.

WARNING

When you connect the trailer be sure to

attach its safety chains to the holes as

illustrated.

IB106

Distribution of load in trailer

aLight

b Moderate

cHeavy

Attach the safety chains to the holes as

illustrated

95_U S_M 07.book Page 178 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

179Starting and driving

Driving with a roof rack

load

The maximum permissible roof load is

220 lbs. (100 kg).

Note that the roof load is included in the

car’s maximum permissible load (see

page 258).

Strong, sturdy roof carriers 3 designed spe-

cially for the car are available from your

Saab dealer. Always secure the roof load

safely.

Fitting the roof carriers 3,

9-5 Sedan and 9-5 SportCombi

without roof rails

The carrier feet are marked with a top view

of the car and arrow indicating their posi-

tions.

1 Slip the plastic cover onto the adjustable

foot of the carrier (foot with knob for

tightening) to protect the paintwork

during assembly.

2 Open all the doors.

Fold back the rubber strip and find the

fixing holes.

3 Start on the left-hand side of the car.

Rest the carrier carefully across the roof,

with the rigid foot towards you. Hold the

foot clear of the roof to avoid damaging

the paintwork.

Fold back the rubber strip and insert the

pins on the foot into the fixing holes.

Make sure that the rubber strip comes

inside the plastic cover on the carrier.

Repeat the procedure with the other

carrier.

WARNING

• A roof load will affect the car’s center

of gravity and aerodynamics. Be

aware of this when cornering and driv-

ing in crosswinds.

• Suit your speed to the prevailing con-

ditions.

• Due to higher aerodynamic drag, fuel

economy may suffer when driving with

a roof rack.

IB480

IB481

95_U S_M 07.book Page 179 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

180 Starting and driving

4 Close the doors on the left-hand side of

the car gently, to hold the carrier feet in

place.

5 Now go around to the other side of the

car and remove the plastic cover from

the carrier’s adjustable foot. Fold back

the rubber strip and insert the pins on the

foot into the fixing holes. Do the same

with the other carrier and close the doors

gently.

6 Tighten each carrier by turning the knob

clockwise (by hand). Tighten just

enough to bring the foot up against the

edges of the fixing holes.

Remove the carriers when not in use, as

they increase fuel consumption.

The instructions that accompany the carri-

ers also include advice on driving with a roof

load – we strongly recommend that you

read them carefully.

Fitting the roof carriers 3,

9-5 SportCombi with roof rails

1 Clean the car’s roof rails.

2 Check the markings on the cross mem-

bers to see which is the front and which

is the rear roof carrier.

3 Place the cross members on the roof

rails, on their respective sides of the

center supports. The cross members

must not be placed beyond the front or

rear joint on the rail. Ensure that the dis-

tance between the cross members is at

least 28 inches (700 mm).

If a roof box is to be fitted, the cross

members must be positioned so that the

tailgate can be opened fully without hit-

ting the roof box.

4 Using your thumb, press the bracket so

that it lies snugly against the outside of

the roof rail. Make sure that the roof car-

riers are seated centrally on the rubber

spacers and that these sit correctly on

the roof rail. Pull the spacers down

slightly on the inside of the roof rail.

5 Center the roof carriers so that they pro-

trude equally on both sides.

6 Tighten the roof carriers by hand.

Ensure that the tightening knobs are

upright once the roof carriers have been

tightened.

7 Make sure the roof carriers are securely

in place.

IB1294IB1295

95_U S_M 07.book Page 180 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

181Starting and driving

Driving at night

Bear in mind the following points when

driving at night:

• Nighttime driving requires your full con-

centration.

• Do not rush. Count on your journey taking

slightly longer.

• The number of drivers under the influence

of drugs is likely to be greater at night than

during the day.

• Do not stare at the headlights of oncom-

ing vehicles.

• Avoid driving at night if you have poor

eyesight. Night vision deteriorates with

age.

• Keep your car's headlights, windows and

mirrors clean. Also, if you wear glasses,

make sure they are clean.

• Make sure you are well rested before

starting a long journey. Take a break

every other hour.

• Only eat light meals. Heavy meals have a

tendency to induce tiredness.

Driving with a load

The driving characteristics of the car are

affected by the way it is loaded.

• Place heavy loads as far forward and as

low as possible in the trunk.

• Secure the load to the tie downs, see

page 131.

• The load should be such that the car´s

total weight or axle weight are not

exceeded, see page 258.

• Heavy loads mean that the car’s center of

gravity is further back. As a result, the car

will sway more during evasive steering.

• Never exceed the permissible load in the

roof box 3, even if there is room for more.

• Ensure that the tire pressure is correct –

slight overinflation is preferable to under-

inflation.

• The braking distance of a loaded car is

always greater. Keep your distance from

the vehicle in front.

• Roof loads can negatively affect tele-

communication.

Tire pressure, see page 268 and back

cover.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 181 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

182 Starting and driving

Tires The tire pressure should match the current

load and speed of the car; for cars sold in

U.S. see page 231; for cars sold in Canada

see page 267.

The tire pressures given apply to cold tires,

that is tires that are the same temperature

as the outside air temperature.

The tire pressure increases as the tires

become warm (e.g. during highway driving)

with approximately 0.3 bar (4 psi). When

the temperature of the tires changes by 50°

(10°C), the tire pressure will change 0.1 bar

(2 psi).

Never reduce the pressure of a hot tire. If the

tires are hot when you check them, only

increase the pressure, if necessary.

Underinflated tires wear more quickly than

slightly overinflated tires.

If a valve is leaking, simply unscrew it and fit

a new one.

Important! Remember to adjust the tire

pressures if you change the load in the car

or intend to drive at substantially lower or

higher speeds than normal.

WARNING

Check the tire pressure at least once a

month and before long journeys. Under-

inflation can result in:

• Punctures

• Separation of the tire and tread

• Damage to the sidewalls

• Damage to the rims on poor roads

• Poor handling characteristics

• Premature tire wear

• Increased fuel consumption.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 182 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

183Starting and driving

Driving with a spare

wheel fitted

See page 235.

Driving with the trunk

lid/tailgate open

Avoid driving with the trunk lid/tailgate partly

or fully open, since exhaust fumes can be

drawn into the cabin.

If you must drive with the trunk lid/tailgate

open, all windows and the moonroof 3 must

be closed and the cabin fan on at its highest

speed setting.

Driving in deep water Towing the car

NOTICE

Do not drive in water deeper than

12 inches (30 cm) and do not drive faster

than 3–4 mph. Water can otherwise be

sucked into the engine. The engine will be

seriously damaged if water enters the

intake system.

WARNING

• Remember that the brake servo does

not operate when the engine is off.

Much greater pressure than normal

will therefore be required to operate

the brake pedal.

• Nor does the steering servo operate

when the engine is off. The steering

will therefore be much heavier than

usual.

• The towing vehicle should always be

heavier than the vehicle on tow.

• Never allow passengers to ride in the

car being towed.

• Always seek professional help if the

car needs to be towed.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 183 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

184 Starting and driving

Front towing eye

The front towing eye is stored with the spare

wheel.

The attachment point (tapped hole) for the

towing eye is midway along the engine sub-

frame at the front of the car.

Remove the plastic plug and screw in the

towing eye securely.

To ensure that the towing eye is in far

enough, insert the handle of the wheel

wrench through the eye for additional

leverage.

Rear towing eye

The car has a permanently mounted towing

eye at the back. If the car is equipped with a

trailer hitch, this can be used instead of the

towing eye.

WARNING

• Make sure that the towing eye at the

front is screwed in tightly.

• The towing eye is only designed for

use when the car is being towed on the

road. It must not be used to pull the

car out of a ditch, for example.

• Make sure that all bystanders keep a

suitable distance, in case the towing

eye or tow rope should break. The

towing eye or tow rope could catapult

off and cause serious injury.

NOTICE

• Do not drive the car with the front

towing eye in position. If it catches the

curb, for example, the engine sub-

frame could be damaged.

• Refit the plastic plug in the hole when

the towing eye has been removed, to

keep dirt and moisture out of the

threads.

IB3885

Front towing eye

IB3886

Rear towing eye

95_U S_M 07.book Page 184 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

185Starting and driving

Towing the car

Gear lever in neutral (in cars with automatic

transmission: selector lever at N (neutral))

Turn on the parking lights.

Drive carefully and do not exceed the

speed limit for vehicles being towed.

Always try to keep the towrope taut by

gently applying the brake, as necessary.

This will avoid the towrope being jerked

violently.

The local regulations on towing speeds

must be followed.

The highest permissible towing speed is

30 mph (50 km/h), unless the legal limit is

lower. The longest permissible towing dis-

tance is 30 miles (50 km). If the car has to

be transported farther than that, summon a

tow truck. A flat bed tow truck is the pre-

ferred method to tow.

Failure to follow these guidelines can result

in damage.

Cars with automatic transmission

The car cannot be push started. In an emer-

gency, it is possible to start the engine using

jump leads (see the section, ”Jump starting”

on page 186).

Transporting the car

NOTICE

•Never use the towing eyes to pull the

car unstuck.

NOTICE

• The car must be towed front first.

• If the car is to be towed with the front

wheels off the ground, make sure the

parking brake is off, as this acts on the

rear wheels.

NOTICE

If a car with a sport (lowered) chassis is

transported, for example on a flat bed

truck, take extra care not to damage the

spoiler and/or underbody.

Never use the towing eyes to pull the car

unstuck

95_U S_M 07.book Page 185 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

186 Starting and driving

Jump starting

If your battery has run down, you may want

to use another vehicle and some jumper

cables to start your Saab. Follow the steps

below to do it safely.

To jump start your vehicle:

1 Check the other vehicle. It must have a

12-volt battery with a negative ground

system.

2 Get the vehicles close enough so the

jumper cables can reach, but be sure the

vehicles are not touching each other. If a

poor connection on the negative jumper

cable should exist, it is possible for

damage to be caused to electrical sys-

tems/components of either vehicle

should inadvertent contact be made.

You would not be able to start your car

and bad grounding could damage elec-

trical systems.

3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.

Turn off all lights that are not needed,

and radios. This will avoid sparks and

help save both batteries and it could

save your radio.

WARNING

• When working on the battery, highly

explosive gas can build up. A spark

could ignite this gas that collects

around the battery.

Therefore, always avoid sparks and

open flames in the vicinity of the bat-

tery.

• The battery contains corrosive sulfuric

acid. Always wear a face mask or gog-

gles when working on the battery.

• If battery acid gets into the eyes or

splashes onto skin or clothing, wash

the affected area liberally with water.

If acid gets into the eyes or a large

quantity makes contact with the skin,

seek medical help.

• Battery posts, terminals and related

accessories contain lead and lead

compounds. Wash your hands after

handling.

NOTICE

Ignoring these steps could result in costly

damage to your vehicle that would not be

covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your car by pushing or pull-

ing it could damage your vehicle, even if

you have a manual transmission. If you

have an automatic transmission, your

vehicle cannot be started by pushing or

pulling it.

NOTICE

If the other system is not a 12-volt system

with a negative ground, both vehicles can

be damaged.

WARNING

You could be injured if the vehicles roll.

Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi-

cle. Put an automatic transmission in P

(Park) or a manual transmission in

Neutral.

IB3931

95_U S_M 07.book Page 186 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

187Starting and driving

4 Open the hood and locate the battery.

Find the positive (+) and negative (–) termi-

nals on the battery.

5 Check that the jumper cables do not

have loose or missing insulation. If they

do, you could get a shock and also the

vehicles could be damaged.

Before you connect the cables, here are

some basic things you should know.

Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and

negative (–) will go to a major metal

engine part with a good ground. Do not

connect (+) to (–) or you will get a short

that could injure you or would damage

the battery and maybe other parts as

well.

6 Connect the red positive (+) cable to the

positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with

the discharged battery.

7 Do not let the other end touch metal.

Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of

the good battery. Use a remote positive

(+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

8 Now connect the black negative (–)

cable to the good battery’s negative

terminal.

NOTICE

If you leave your radio on, it could be

badly damaged. The repairs would not be

covered by your warranty.

WARNING

An electric fan can start up even when the

engine is not running and can injure you.

Keep hands, clothing and tools away from

any underhood electric fan.

WARNING

Using a match or flame of any kind near a

battery can cause battery gas to explode.

You can suffer burns or be blinded. Use a

flashlight if you need more light.

Be sure the battery has enough water.

The battery installed in your new Saab

has filler caps. Be sure the right amount

of water is there. Add distilled or boiled

water if the level is too low. If you don’t,

explosive gas could be present.

Be sure the electrolyte in the battery is not

frozen. Discharged batteries will freeze.

When connecting jumper cables to a

frozen battery, gas from the chemical

reaction inside the battery can build up

under the ice and cause an explosion.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn

you. Do not get it on you. If you acciden-

tally get it in your eyes or on your skin,

flush the area with water and get medical

help immediately.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 187 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

188 Starting and driving

9 Attach the cable at least 18 inches

(45 cm) away from the discharged bat-

tery, but not near engine parts that

move. To avoid an arc which could deto-

nate the hydrogen gas around the bat-

tery, the final connection must be at least

18” from the battery.

10 Start the vehicle with the good battery

and run the engine for a while.

11 Try to start the vehicle with the dis-

charged battery. If it does not start after

a few tries, it probably needs service.

12 Remove the cables in reverse order to

prevent electrical shorting. Take care

that they do not touch each other or any

other metal.

Charging the battery/Jump

starting

To avoid damaging the car’s electrical

system and electronics, the following rules

must be followed when charging the battery

or jump starting the car.

• If the charger 3 or starter unit 3 can be

set to different voltages

(6V/12V/18V/24V), 12V must be

selected.

• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions

supplied with the charger or starter unit.

• Nothing that is plugged into an electrical

outlet should be connected to the car

during charging or jump starting.

• The charger or starter unit must under no

conditions produce a voltage greater

than:

• 16V continuous

• 18V for 60 min.

• If you are unsure about the charge rating

of the unit, disconnect the battery clamp

from the positive terminal before connect-

ing the unit to the battery.

WARNING

Do not let the other end touch anything

until the next step. The other end of the

negative cable does not go to the dead

battery. It goes to a major metal part with

a good ground on the engine of the vehi-

cle with the discharged battery.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 188 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

189Car care and technical information

IB3888

Hood ________________ 190

Engine compartment __ 191

Emission control

systems ____________ 192

Engine ______________ 194

Engine oil ____________ 194

Transmission fluid ____ 195

Coolant______________ 195

Brake and clutch fluid__ 196

Power steering fluid ___ 198

Air filter _____________ 198

Battery ______________ 199

Drive belts ___________ 201

Wipers and washers ___ 202

Changing bulbs _______ 204

Fuses _______________ 216

Tires ________________ 222

Compact spare tire ____ 234

Safety belts __________ 239

Upholstery and trim ___ 240

Textile carpeting ______ 240

Washing the car ______ 241

Waxing and polishing__ 242

Engine compartment __ 242

Touching up the paint _ 242

Air conditioning (ACC) _ 243

Anti-corrosion treatment 245

For long trips_________ 246

Recovery and/or

recycling of automotive

materials ___________ 247

Headlight aiming ______ 247

Car care and technical information

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,

market specification, options or accessories).

95_U S_M 07.book Page 189 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

190 Car care and technical information

Hood

The hood release handle is located under-

neath the instrument panel. To open the

hood:

1 Pull the release handle.

2 The front of the hood will now spring up,

providing access to the secondary

safety catch.

3 Push the catch upwards, pushing the

hood downward a little bit at the same

time. The hood can now be lifted right

up.

To close the hood, release it from a height

of about 8 - 16 in (20-40 cm). Do not press

down on it.

Check that the hood is now closed securely.

WARNING

Never hold your fingers between the hood

and safety catch if lowering but not clos-

ing the hood.

IB3890

IB3889

Hood release handle Hood secondary safety catch

95_U S_M 07.book Page 190 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

191Car care and technical information

Engine compartment

9 68

1 2 43

IB3637

Engine compartment

1 Engine-oil dipstick/filler cap

2 Reservoir, brake/clutch fluid

3 Fuse box

4 Expansion tank, coolant

5 Washer-fluid filler cap

6Battery

7 Turbo unit

8 Ignition discharge module

9 Reservoir, power-steering fluid

95_U S_M 07.book Page 191 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

192 Car care and technical information

Engine families

Saab cars imported into the United States

and Canada meet all applicable emission

control standards. The engine family and

appropriate tune-up specifications are iden-

tified on a label affixed to the left front inner

fender.

These engine families meet applicable EPA

Federal Standards, California State Stan-

dards and Canadian Federal Standards and

are equipped with the following systems:

• Sequential multiport fuel injection system

• Three way catalytic converter

• Crankcase emissions control system

• Evaporative emission control system

• On-Board diagnostic (OBD II) system.

Emission control

systems

The systems for controlling emissions to the

atmosphere require regular checking and

adjustment at the intervals specified in the

service program.

In addition to meeting the exhaust emission

regulations and thereby helping to keep the

environment clean, a correctly tuned engine

will also give maximum fuel economy.

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,

and certain vehicle components contain

or emit chemicals known to the State of

CA to cause cancer and birth defects and

reproductive harm. In addition, certain

fluids contained in vehicles and certain

products of component wear contain or

emit chemicals known to the State of Cali-

fornia to cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 192 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

193Car care and technical information

Saab Trionic engine

management system

The Saab Trionic engine management

system is a unique Saab development that

combines sequential multiport fuel injection,

electronic distributorless ignition and turbo-

charger boost pressure control into one sys-

tem.

The Trionic engine control module (ECM)

monitors many different engine parameters

such as:

• Intake manifold pressure

• Intake air temperature

• Crankshaft position

• Engine coolant temperature

• Throttle position and

• The oxygen content of the exhaust gases.

The ECM receives information regarding

engine knocking from a sophisticated feed-

back function in the ignition discharge unit.

By processing all of this information, the Tri-

onic system can control fuel injector open-

ing duration, ignition timing and turbo-

charger boost pressure to provide excellent

engine performance while maintaining low

emissions and fuel consumption.

ORVR (Onboard Refueling Vapor

Recovery)

Hydrocarbon vapors formed when refueling

will be recovered by the car and not

released into the atmosphere. The hydro-

carbons are absorbed in a evaporative

emission canister. When the engine is sub-

sequently started, the evaporative emission

canister is gradually purged as air is sucked

into it through a shut-off valve. The hydro-

carbon/air mixture passes through the evap

canister purge valve and into the engine

where it is burned.

When refueling, make sure you screw the

filler cap on and keep turning until it has

clicked at least 3 times. Otherwise, it is pos-

sible for the CHECK ENGINE light to illumi-

nate.

Refueling, see page 146.

NOTICE

The Trionic engine management system

continuously monitors the operation of

these systems and has on-board diag-

nostic capabilities (OBD II).

If the ”Engine malfunction (CHECK

ENGINE)” lamp in the main instru-

ment illuminates, this indicates that the

Trionic ECM has detected a problem. The

car will continue to operate, but perfor-

mance may be diminished. You should

have your car checked by a Saab dealer

as soon as possible.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 193 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

194 Car care and technical information

Engine

The 2.3-liter model is a transverse, 4-cylin-

der in-line engine with twin overhead cam-

shafts and 4 valves per cylinder.

This engine is equipped with balance shafts

that reduce engine vibration to a minimum.

The balance shafts are chain driven and

rotate at twice the speed of the crankshaft.

They produce forces and torques that are

opposed to those generated by the pistons

and connecting rods, an effect that occurs

twice for each revolution of the engine.

Engine noise is also reduced as the

counter-rotating shafts counteract the vibra-

tion from the moving parts of the engine.

The transmission, located on the right

(viewed from the front), is integrated with

the engine. All models have front-wheel

drive. Engine oil

Checking the oil level

Check the engine-oil level regularly. This

should be done after the engine has been

run to normal temperature and then allowed

to cool for 2–5 minutes, with the car stand-

ing on level ground. Remove the dipstick

and wipe it clean before checking the level.

The oil level must not be allowed to drop

below the MIN mark on the dipstick, nor

should oil be filled beyond the MAX mark, as

this can lead to excessive oil consumption.

The distance between the MIN and MAX

marks on the dipstick corresponds to a

volume of approximately 1.05 qts (1 liter).

When necessary, add oil of the recom-

mended grade via the dipstick tube.

Recommended oil grade, see page 261.

NOTICE

• Do not operate the engine with a low

oil level.

• Change engine oil and oil filter as pre-

scribed in the service programme.

• Only use the recommended oil type.

Follow the three points listed above to

avoid severe engine damage.

More frequent oil changes are recom-

mended if your vehicle is operated under

certain conditions, see page 252.

IB601

Balance shafts

95_U S_M 07.book Page 194 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

195Car care and technical information

Transmission fluid

Manual transmission

Check and top up the fluid in accordance

with the service program.

Automatic transmission

Check and top up the fluid in accordance

with the service program.

Coolant

There is an overpressure in the cooling sys-

tem. Coolant temperatures can sometimes

exceed 212°F (100 °C).

The expansion tank is transparent to facili-

tate checking of the coolant level.

When the engine is cold, the coolant shall lie

on or just above the KALT/COLD mark on

the expansion tank.

If the message

”Coolant level low.

Refill.”

is displayed on the SID, check the level of

fluid in the expansion tank.

Top up, as necessary, with equal parts of

clean water and Saab-approved coolant.

Coolants of a different brand could damage

the engine or cooling system. We therefore

recommend strict use of coolants that have

been approved by Saab.

If the expansion tank is empty when coolant

is added, run the engine to normal temper-

ature and top up again, as necessary.

WARNING

• Proceed with caution if the radiator is

boiling when you open the hood.

Never remove the expansion-tank

filler cap when the radiator is boiling.

• The cooling system is pressurized –

hot coolant and vapor can escape

when the filler cap is released. These

can cause injury to your eyes and

burns. Loosen the cap carefully, and

let the engine cool before removing

the cap.

• Exercise care when adding coolant.

C oolant on hot surfaces constitutes a

fire risk.

IB1338

Coolant expansion tank

95_U S_M 07.book Page 195 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

196 Car care and technical information

The cooling system is charged at the factory

with coolant containing a 45 % concentra-

tion of a combined antifreeze and corrosion

inhibitor. A weaker mixture will result in

reduced anticorrosion protection. For pro-

tection against freezing in very cold

weather, a stronger concentration will be

needed.

A 60 % concentration of antifreeze will pro-

vide protection at temperatures down to

–58°F (–50°C).

The coolant does not normally have to be

changed during the service life of the car.

The type of coolant used has a reddish color

and should not be mixed with other types of

coolant. Saab Original coolant should be

used all year round. Only use coolant

approved by Saab.

Note:

If incorrect coolant is used or added, the

life-time properties will be affected. Even if

the coolant is flushed from the system and

replaced with life-time coolant, life-time

properties are no longer retained and the

coolant must then be drained and replaced

at regular intervals.

Brake and clutch fluid

Checking the fluid level

The combined brake and clutch-fluid reser-

voir is transparent to facilitate checking of

the fluid level.

The level should be between the MAX and

MIN marks. Top up, as necessary, with

DOT 4 fluid. Do

not

use DOT 5 brake fluid.

NOTICE

Always mix the antifreeze with the

appropriate volume of water before

adding it to the cooling system.

If pure antifreeze is added, the engine

could still freeze and be damaged. This is

because the antifreeze will not mix

properly with the coolant before the

thermostat has opened to allow full

circulation.

WARNING

Brake fluid deteriorates as it becomes

old. Because it is hygroscopic, it absorbs

water from the air and, in time, could allow

vapor to form in the brake system, thus

reducing its performance. It is therefore

important that brake fluid be changed reg-

ularly, as specified in the service pro-

gram.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 196 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

197Car care and technical information

Use only new brake fluid from a sealed con-

tainer.

Check that there are no leaks in the brake

system.

The brake fluid level will fall somewhat as

the brake pads wear. The MAX level in the

reservoir corresponds to the amount of

brake fluid required with new brake pads. If

the fall in fluid level is moderate, due to

normal brake pad wear, topping up is not

necessary.

Changing of the brake fluid should be

carried out by a workshop. We recom-

mend that you contact an authorized

Saab dealer.

The vehicle´s regular braking system is

adjusted automatically, but the parking

brake has to be adjusted manually. This

work, involving adjustment of the parking

brake cables and brake pads, must only be

carried out by a workshop. We recommend

that you contact an authorized Saab dealer.

It is not possible to detect, through abnormal

pedal or parking brake-lever travel, whether

brake pads are worn and need replacing. It

is therefore essential that brake pads be

checked regularly, as specified in the ser-

vice program.

Brake pad wear indicators

The outboard brake pads on the front

wheels incorporate pad-wear indicators.

When the lining is down to 0.11 in (3 mm),

the pad will produce a screeching, squeal-

ing or scraping noise when the brakes are

applied. New pads should be fitted without

delay.

Brake pads should only be changed by a

workshop. We recommend that you con-

tact an authorized Saab dealer.

NOTICE

Avoid spilling brake fluid onto paintwork,

since it can cause the paint to bubble and

lift. If any brake fluid is spilled, the area

should be flushed with large quantities of

water as quickly as possible.

IB1188

Brake and clutch-fluid reservoir

95_U S_M 07.book Page 197 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

198 Car care and technical information

Power steering fluid

Check the level of the power steering fluid in

the reservoir regularly, in accordance with

the service program.

The wheels should point forward during the

check.

Clean around the cap before it is

unscrewed. Clean the dipstick. Screw in the

cap completely again before checking the

level.

The oil should lie between the MAX and MIN

marks when the oil temperature is about

70°F (+20°C). If the oil is colder the level can

be lower, and in higher temperatures the

level can be higher, both of which are

acceptable.

Top up with ”Power Steering Fluid CHF 11S

or CHF 202”.

Air filter

WARNING

• Do not fill the power steering fluid to

above the MAX mark. Too much fluid

can result in leakage.

• Power steering fluid on hot engine

components constitutes a fire risk.

WARNING

• For Service and Repair, parts equiva-

lent to those used by Saab should be

used.

• Be aware that some non standard

replacement parts may put you in an

unsafe condition, even if they might fit.

IB501

Power steering fluid reservoir

95_U S_M 07.book Page 198 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

199Car care and technical information

Battery

The battery is provided with a cover to pro-

tect it from radiated heat. If the battery is

exposed to high temperatures, its life will be

shortened. To remove the cover, release

the two clips along its long sides.

The cover fits the standard battery installed

in the car. If a new battery is to be fitted,

make sure that its dimensions are the same

as the standard one.

The battery is maintenance free and should

be changed if the electrolyte level is too low.

The indicator on the top side of the battery

will be white if the battery needs replacing.

The fluid level and the charge level should

be checked regularly.

If frequent short journeys are made, the bat-

tery may need to be given a booster charge.

This can be done either using a battery

charger or by taking the car for a long run.

A car with a standard equipment specifica-

tion and a fully charged battery can be left

for up to 40 days and still have a sufficient

charge for starting. If extra equipment is fit-

ted, such as a car phone, the charge may

only be sufficient for about 15 days.

WARNING

• Work on the battery may entail an

explosion hazard, since the battery

gives off hydrogen which forms an

explosive mixture with the oxygen in

the air.

For this reason, always avoid sparks

or open flames when working near the

battery.

• The battery contains corrosive sulfuric

acid. Always wear a face mask or

goggles when working on the battery.

• If battery acid gets into the eyes or

splashes the skin or clothing, wash the

affected area liberally with water.

If acid gets into the eyes or a large

quantity makes contact with the skin,

seek medical help.

• Battery posts, terminals and related

accessories contain lead and lead

compounds. Wash your hands after

handling.

NOTICE

A discharged battery can freeze and frac-

ture. Batteries should therefore always be

stored away from frost.

IB3129

Electrolyte level indicator.

Level correct if level indicator dark.

Battery should be changed if indicator is

light

95_U S_M 07.book Page 199 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

200 Car care and technical information

Charging/replacing the battery

Connect the positive lead to the positive (+)

battery terminal (red), and the negative lead

to a good ground point, e.g. the lifting lug at

the front of the engine.

To remove the battery, always disconnect

the negative (black) lead first and reconnect

it last when fitting the new battery.

The battery size must comply with DIN

53735 MFI 230/2.16.

NOTICE

To avert the danger of short-circuiting

between the positive (+) terminal on the

battery and the inlet manifold on the

engine, always disconnect the negative

(–) battery lead first and reconnect it last.

NOTICE

• If boost charging never use anything

but a 12-volt charger, see page 188.

• Never reverse the polarity of the bat-

tery by connecting the leads to the

wrong terminals. The red, positive

lead connects to the positive (+) termi-

nal, and the black, negative lead to the

negative (–) terminal.

• Serious damage can occur to the car´s

electrical system if a battery or alterna-

tor lead is disconnected while the

engine is running.

• The nut on the battery clamp should

be tightened to a torque of 10 Nm.

IB3131

Correct position for battery clamp

IB3130

Battery

95_U S_M 07.book Page 200 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

201Car care and technical information

Drive belts

The alternator is situated on the right-hand

side of the engine, adjacent to the bulkhead.

It is driven via a Poly-V-belt from the crank-

shaft pulley.

The Poly-V-belt also drives the water pump,

the A/C compressor and the steering servo

pump.

The belt tension is critical and is adjusted

automatically by the belt tensioner.

See also page 59, ”Warning, charging”.

WARNING

• Keep hands and clothing clear of drive

belts when engine is running.

• Always stop the engine before

inspecting drive belt.

• The radiator fan is electric and can

start even when the engine is

switched off.

NOTICE

Serious damage can be done to the car’s

electrical system if an alternator lead is

disconnected while the engine is running.

IB929

Routing of the drive belt

95_U S_M 07.book Page 201 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

202 Car care and technical information

Wipers and washers

Check and clean all wiper blades regularly.

If poor wiper performance is experienced,

clean the windshield with a quality glass

cleaner. This is particularly important if the

car has been through an automatic car

wash, as these sometimes leave a wax

coating on the windshield.

If wiper performance is still unsatisfactory,

fit new blades.

Changing the windshield wiper

blades

Lift the wiper arm off the windshield

1 Depress the catch.

2 Pull the complete blade assembly down

to free it from the wiper arm, and then lift

it off the arm.

Washer jets

The washer jets can be adjusted and, if

necessary, unclogged by means of a pin.

IB506

Cleaning/adjusting the washer jets

95_U S_M 07.book Page 202 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

203Car care and technical information

Washers

The washer-fluid reservoir holds 6.4 quarts

(6 liters). When

"Washer fluid level low.

Refill."

comes up on the SID, the reservoir is down

to about 1 quart (1 liter) of fluid. Add at least

50 % of washer- fluid to water to prevent

freezing and for effective cleaning.

WARNING

Take care not to spill washer fluid

concentrate onto hot surfaces. Washer

fluid concentrate contains flammable

ingredients such as alcohol.

IB1784

Washer-fluid filler cap

IB1783

The headlights have high-pressure

washers

95_U S_M 07.book Page 203 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

204 Car care and technical information

Changing bulbs Check that the new bulb is working when fin-

ished.

Use only "Long Life" bulbs.

Headlight aiming, see page 247.

Xenon headlight 3

Xenon headlights produce roughly twice as

much light as halogen bulbs and have a sig-

nificantly longer service life.

The lamp units consist of a gas discharge

lamp containing xenon. When the lights are

switched on a very high voltage activates

the xenon gas. The lamps soon reach full

intensity.

Cars with xenon headlights have automatic

levelling. The levelling system comprises

two sensors on the front axle, one on the

rear axle and a control unit under the head-

light housing. Headlight alignment is regu-

lated automatically to prevent dazzling

oncoming traffic. Alignment is also adjusted

during braking.

WARNING

Before changing a bulb in the engine bay,

switch off the engine to avoid danger of

fingers and hands being injured by

moving parts.

The radiator fan can start up even when

the engine is switched off.

Xenon headlights 3 are high voltage

and must therefore be changed at a

workshop. We recommend that you

contact an authorized Saab work-

shop. Work involving high-voltage

components is potentially lethal.

NOTICE

• Since the headlight lenses are made

of plastic, rinse dried-on dirt with

water and allow it time to soften up

before cleaning the lenses. Avoid

rubbing the lenses when dry and

never use solvents.

• Use de-icer spray instead of scraping

the ice off.

NOTICE

• Do not fit bulbs with a higher rating

than 55 W, since the headlight reflec-

tor and the wiring of the car are not

designed for a higher wattage.

• Switch off the ignition before chang-

ing a bulb, to avoid possible short-cir-

cuiting.

• Do not touch the glass of the bulbs

with your fingers. The oil on your skin

can shorten the life of the bulb.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 204 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

205 Car care and technical information

Headlight bulb for high beam (Halogen)

On cars equipped with Xenon lamps the Halogen lamps are used

only for high beam flasher if the daytime running lights are deacti-

vated and the headlight switch is in the off position (otherwise Xenon

lamp is utilized):

1 Remove the cover from the back of the lamp unit. To improve

accessibility to the right-hand side, hold back the induction air

hose. To improve accessibility to the left-hand side, remove the

battery cover. Release the two clips along the long sides of the

cover.

2 Hold the connector and move the bulb up and down slightly while

pulling it out.

3 Detach the connector from the bulb.

4 Fit the new bulb in the connector without touching the lens with

fingers.

5 Align and fit the bulb in its guide in the reflector by moving it up

and down slightly while pushing it forward.

6Fit the cover.

IB3894

IB3895

The three covers of the headlight.

The left-hand cover is for the direction indicator. Replacement of

this bulb should be carried out by a workshop. We recommend

that you contact an authorized Saab workshop.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 205 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

206Car care and technical information

Headlight bulb for low beam (Halogen)

1 Take off the cover from the back of the lamp unit. To improve

accessibility to the right-hand headlight, hold aside the induction

air hose. To improve accessibility to the left-hand headlight,

remove the battery cover. Release the two clips along the long

sides of the cover.

2 Unplug the connector.

3 To remove the spring clip, push it in and then move it to the right.

4 Remove the bulb.

5 Without touching the glass with your fingers, insert the new bulb.

6 Line up the bulb with the guide in the reflector and secure it with

the spring clip.

7 Plug in the connector.

8Fit the cover.

Low beam bulb 3

On certain variants the low beam bulb is fitted in the same way as

the high beam bulb, without spring clips, see previous page.

IB3896

IB3898

Contact an

authorized

Saab workshop

if a Xenon

headlight

requires

replacement

95_U S_M 07.book Page 206 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

207Car care and technical information

Parking-light bulb

The parking light bulb is situated in the lower

edge of the lamp housing.

The bulb holder has been extended to facil-

itate replacement.

1 Pull the extended bulb holder straight

out.

2 Change the bulb.

3 Make sure that the O-ring is correctly

positioned so as to seal against the lamp

housing.

When the bulb holder is slid in, it does

not matter which direction the bulb

holder grip is held.

Front fog lights 3

1 From under the front bumper, grip the

bulb holder and twist counterclockwise.

2 Unplug the connector.

3 Change the bulb.

Refit in the reverse order.

Front direction indicator

Direction indicator bulb replacement should

be carried out by a workshop.

We recommend that you contact an author-

ized Saab dealer.

WARNING

Never crawl under a car that is supported

only by a jack. Always use axle stands.

Refer to the information on jacks on page

236.

IB3899

Parking-light bulb

IB3901

Front fog lights

95_U S_M 07.book Page 207 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

208 Car care and technical information

Rear light cluster, 9-5 Sedan

The bulbs for the lamps in the rear light clus-

ter are accessed from the luggage compart-

ment.

1 Lower the flap (secured with catches).

2 Squeeze the plastic lugs and remove the

bulb holder.

3 The bulb has a bayonet fitting. Press in

the bulb and twist it counterclockwise.

4 Change the bulb.

IB3906

IB3907

IB3908

2 4

Rear light clusters, 9-5 SportCombi

1 Direction indicators

2 Stop lights and taillights

3 Reversing lights

4 Rear fog light

5 High-mounted brake light

Rear light clusters, 9-5 Sedan

1 Direction indicators

2 Stop lights and taillights

3 Reversing lights

4 Rear fog light

5 High-mounted brake light

95_U S_M 07.book Page 208 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

209Car care and technical information

Trunk lid light and taillights,

9-5 Sedan

Before changing bulbs in the trunk, you

must first release the trim at the foot of the

trunk. This involves removing the handle

and the three trim fasteners (studs).

1 Unscrew the handle on the inside of the

tailgate.

2 Using the peg in the top of the screw-

driver handle, push in the button in the

center of the studs.

3 Remove the studs.

Changing bulbs

1 Squeeze together the silver plastic lug

and the electrical connection and with-

draw the lamp holder.

2 The bulb has a bayonet fitting. Press in

the bulb and twist it counterclockwise.

3 Change the bulb.

Refitting the trim

1 Reset the studs by pushing back the

center buttons so that they protrude by

0.2 inch (5 mm).

2 Insert the studs through the trim and tail-

gate panel. Press the center buttons in,

flush with the collar.

3 Screw the handle back onto the trunk.

IB3909

IB518

95_U S_M 07.book Page 209 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

210 Car care and technical information

High-mounted stop lights,

9-5 Sedan

The bulbs can be accessed after the panel

in the rear headlining has been removed.

1 Remove the panel by carefully pushing

in the two clips, one at the time.

2 Release the bulb holder, which is

retained by a clip at either end.

3 Withdraw the bulb gently straight back.

4 Push in the new bulb.

5 Refit the bulb holder.

6 Replace the panel by carefully pushing

the panel towards the headlining so that

the two clips engage their respective

slot. Rear lights clusters,

9-5 SportCombi

1 Open the tailgate.

2 Remove the two screws securing the

light cluster to the body.

32 23

IB519

High-mounted stop lights

1 Panel

2 Retaining clips

3 Bulbs

IB3911

95_U S_M 07.book Page 210 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

211Car care and technical information

3 Remove the two screws securing the

light cluster to the body.

4 Pull the light cluster rearwards and

angle it outwards (it is seated quite

firmly).

5 Release the fastener from the body.

Reinsert the fastener into the groove in

the light cluster. Press in the fastener

until you hear a click.

6 Take out the bulb holder.

7 Press in the bulb and twist it counter-

clockwise.

8 Change the bulb.

9 Check that the new bulb works.

Reassembly:

1 Align the fastener with the hole in the

body.

2 Press the lamp unit home into the body

until you hear a click.

3 Fit the screws.

IB3912

IB3913

95_U S_M 07.book Page 211 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

212 Car care and technical information

Tailgate bulbs, 9-5 SportCombi

1 Turn the lock a quarter turn (90°) with a

screwdriver or the ignition key.

2 Open and remove the cover.

3 Remove the bulb holder by pressing the

plastic lug to the side.

4 Press in the bulb and twist it

counterclockwise.

5 Change the bulb.

6 Check that the new bulb is working.

Reassembly:

1 Place the two ”hinges” in the recess in

the tailgate.

2 Then push the ”hinges” into the recess

and close the cover.

3 Turn the lock a quarter turn.

IB3914

IB3915

95_U S_M 07.book Page 212 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

213Car care and technical information

License-plate light

The lens is not screwed in place. It is held in

place with snaps.

1 One of the short sides of the lens con-

tains a recess for a small screwdriver.

Insert a screwdriver and prise out the

lens.

2 Fit the new bulb.

3 When refitting the lens, the short side

without the screwdriver recess should

be inserted first.

Side direction indicators

1 Slide the lamp fitting forward and pull out

the back.

2 Remove the bulb.

3 Change the bulb.

On refitting, make sure that the spring in the

lamp fitting engages the edge of the open-

ing in the body panel.

Courtesy lights (front doors and

floor) and luggage-compartment

lighting

1 Insert a screwdriver carefully into the

slot in the end of the lamp fitting. Ease

the fitting off to gain access to the bulb.

2 Bend out one of the contacts and

remove the bulb.

3 Change the bulb.

On refitting, insert the connector-end of the

lamp fitting first.

IB522

IB3922

95_U S_M 07.book Page 213 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

214 Car care and technical information

Dome light, front

1 Ease the leading edge of the glass out

of the overhead panel.

2 Release one of the contacts and remove

the bulb.

3 Fit the new bulb.

Dome light, rear

1 Remove the entire overhead panel:

ease out the trailing end first, and then

both front edges.

2 Fit the new bulb.

Glove-compartment illumination

1 Insert a small screwdriver in the slot in

the end of the lamp fitting and ease it out

to gain access to the bulb.

2 Bend out one of the contacts and

remove the bulb.

3 Fit the new bulb.

On refitting, insert the connector-end of the

lamp fitting first.

Other bulbs

If any other bulbs need changing, you are

advised to take the car to a workshop. We

recommend that you contact an authorized

Saab dealer.

IB524

IB525

IB523

95_U S_M 07.book Page 214 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

215 Car care and technical information

Bulb table

A special kit containing spare bulbs and fuses is available as an

accessory from your Saab dealer. A storage space for this is pro-

vided adjacent to the toolkit and jack, under the panel in the luggage

compartment.

# Cap Wattage

1 H7 55 Headlight

2 H8 35 Fog light

3 P21W 21 Reversing lamp; rear fog lamp; rear direc-

tion indicator

4 P21/5W 21/5 Stop/tail lamp

5 R10W 10 Dome light; courtesy lights; glove com-

partment; luggage compartment

6 R5W 5 Safety belt reminder; license-plate lighting

7 Xenon

w9U

6 Reading light, overhead panel

8 T4W 4 Reading light, rear

9WY5W/

W5W

5 Side indicators (yellow);/ high-mounted

stop light (9-5 Sedan); parking lights

10 W2W 1.2 Switches

NOTICE

Only fit lamps of the specified rating. Lamps of the wrong wattage

could damage the wiring harness and electronics.

IB4095

95_U S_M 07.book Page 215 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

216 Car care and technical information

Fuses

The fuses are housed in two fuse panels:

one at the end of the instrument panel on the

driver’s side, and one under the hood.

To check if a fuse has blown, first remove it

from the panel (see below). If the filament is

broken, the fuse has blown.

A special tool for removing fuses is provided

at the bottom of the fuse panel at the end of

the instrument panel. Simply push the tool

onto the fuse, squeeze and remove the

fuse.

WARNING

To avoid the risk of short-circuiting and/or

fire breaking out in the electrical system,

the following advice should be heeded:

• Always consult a workshop before

modifying or adding any electrical

equipment. We recommend that you

contact an authorized Saab dealer.

Failure to do so can result in the elec-

trical system being damaged.

• Never replace a fuse with one having

a higher/lower rating than specified

(see page 218). The color of the fuse

indicates its amperage.

• If the same fuse blows repeatedly,

have the electrical system checked by

a workshop. We recommend that you

contact an authorized Saab dealer.

• If a MAXI fuse blows, it means that

there is a major fault in the electrical

system. Have the car checked by a

workshop. We recommend that you

contact an authorized Saab dealer.

IB527

Fuse panel in instrument panel

IB1794

Fuse box under the hood

IB144

Sound fuse / Blown fuse

95_U S_M 07.book Page 216 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

217Car care and technical information

Maxi fuses

The Maxi fuses are housed in the fuse box

under the hood. These fuses can be

checked in the same way as the other fuses.

The Maxi fuses are designed to protect the

car’s electrical system from being dam-

aged. Each Maxi fuse protects a number of

electrical circuits and functions and there-

fore has a higher rating (amperage) than the

standard fuses. No spare Maxi fuses are

supplied with the car.

DICE / TWICE

DICE = Dashboard Integrated Central Elec-

tronics

TWICE = Theft-Warning Central Electronics

DICE and TWICE are electronic control

modules that monitor and control a variety

of functions:

DICE controls (among other things):

• Front lights and interior lighting

• Instrument illumination

• Intermittent wiper operation

• Electric heating of rear window and door

mirrors

• Cooling fans

TWICE controls (among other things):

• Central locking.

• Car alarm (Anti-theft system)

• Engine immobilizer

• Autochecking of lights.

• Electric heating of rear seat

• Safety belt reminder

• Electrically adjustable passenger seat

The DICE and TWICE control modules are

linked to a data bus, which is basically an

information carrier that allows information to

be exchanged between all the control mod-

ules and components connected to the bus.

If a fault occurs in any of these components,

diagnostic faults codes are set in the rele-

vant control module, which facilitates fault

diagnosis. We recommend that you contact

an authorized Saab dealer.

The scan tool connector for fault diagnosis

is located under the instrument panel on the

drivers side.

NOTICE

If a Maxi fuse blows, it means that there is

a major fault in the electrical system.

Have the car checked without delay by a

workshop. We recommend that you con-

tact an authorized Saab dealer.

IB1795

Maxi fuses under the hood

95_U S_M 07.book Page 217 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

218Car care and technical information

Fuse panel in instrument panel

# Amp Function

A 30 Trailer lights

B 10 Automatic transmission

C 7.5 Electric door mirrors; DICE: manual beam length

adjustment 3

1 15 Brake lights; Park Brake Shift Lock (cars with auto-

matic transmission)

2 15 Reversing lights

3 10 Parking lights and taillights, left

4 10 Parking lights and taillights, right

5 7.5 DICE / TWICE

6 30 Electric windows, right; trailer charging

6B 7.5 Brake lights, trailer

7 10 Engine injectors

8 15 Trunk lighting; trunk lock; door lighting; parking

assistant 3; SID

9 15 Audio System; CD changer 3

10 15 Heating, rear seat 3; moonroof 3, remote control

receiver

11 30 Electrically adjusted passenger seat 3

12 7.5 Automatic transmission 3

13 20 Audio System, amplifier

14 30 Ignition system, engine

15 20 Fuel pump

16 20 DICE (direction indicators)

16B – OnStar 3

17 20 Engine-management system; main instrument;

DICE/TWICE

18 40 Door-mirror heating; rear-window heating

19 10 OnStar 3; Telematics 3

20 15 ACC; interior lighting; rear fog light; high beam flasher

21 10 Audio System; rear-view mirror; load angle sensor 3;

navigation 3; Cruise Control 3

22 40 Interior fan

23 15 Central locking; navigation 3; door mirror memory 3

24 20 Main light switch

25 30 Electrically adjustable driver’s seat

IB2439

B C 1 2 3 4 5 6

1110

713

6B 15 16

23 24

222120

1918

16B

25 26 27 28 29 30 31

3534

95_U S_M 07.book Page 218 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

219 Car care and technical information

Relay panel under instrument panel

26 7,5 Driver seat memory 3; mirrors memory 3;

moonroof 3; parking assistant 3; seatbelt reminder;

ACC

27 10 Engine-management system; SID; main instrument

28 7.5 Airbag

29 7.5 ABS/ESP®

30 7.5 Starter motor; transmission control module (cars with

automatic transmission)

31 7.5 Cruise control 3; water valve; fog lights, front 3; rain

sensor 3

32 – –

33 7.5 Direction-indicator switch

34 30 12-volt socket (cigarette lighter) front/rear

35 15 Daytime running light

36 30 Electric windows, left

37 30 Windshield wipers

38 30 Electric heating, front seats 3

39 20 Limp-home solenoid

# Function

A –

B Electric heating of rear seat

C1 –

C2 –

D–

E Main relay (engine management system)

F–

G Fuel pump

H Ignition switch

I Rear-window / door mirrors heating

IB3916

BC1 C2

95_U S_M 07.book Page 219 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

220Car care and technical information

Fuse box under hood

Fuses

J–

KStarter relay

L1 Limp-home function

L2 –

# Amp Function

1 40 Radiator fan, high speed

240

ABS/ESP®

330

ABS/ESP®

4 7.5 Load angle sensor (cars with xenon headlights)

515Heater

6 10 A/C; car alarm siren

715Bulb test

8––

9 20 Headlight washers

IB1797

15 16

85 1714

74 1613

31512

95_U S_M 07.book Page 220 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

221 Car care and technical information

Relays

10 15 High beam headlight, left

11 15 Low beam headlight left

12 15 High beam headlight, right

13 15 Low beam headlight, right

14 30 Radiator fan, high speed

15 15 Fog lights (front spoiler)

16 20 Wiper, rear

17 15 Horn

18 – –

# Function

1 Bulb test; head light; high beam flasher

2 Headlight washer

3 Front fog lights

4 Wiper, rear (9-5 SportCombi)

5–

6–

7 Rain sensor

8 Radiator fan, low speed

9 Radiator fan, high speed

10 A/C-compressor

11 Radiator fan, high speed, right fan

12 Horn

13 Extra lights (accessory)

14 High beam headlight

15 Low beam headlight

16 –

17 Windshield wipers

95_U S_M 07.book Page 221 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

222 Car care and technical information

Tires

Your new vehicle comes with high-quality

tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If

you ever have questions about your tire

warranty and where to obtain service, see

your Saab Warranty and Service Record

Booklet for details.

Inflation - Tire Pressure

The Tire-Loading Information label shows

the correct inflation pressures for your tires

when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehi-

cle has been sitting for at least three hours

or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Notice:

Don’t let anyone tell you that

underinflation or overinflation is all

right. It’s not. If your tires don’t have

enough air (underinflation), you can get

the following:

• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Bad wear

• Bad handling

• Bad fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (overinfla-

tion), you can get the following:

• Unusual wear

• Bad handling

• Rough ride

Needless damage from road hazards

Adjust the tire pressure to match the current

load and speed of the car (see page 267).

The stated tire pressures apply to cold tires,

i.e. tires that are the same temperature as

the outside air temperature. Tire pressure

increases as the tires become warm (e.g.

during highway driving) by approximately

0.3 bar (4 psi). When the temperature of the

tires changes by 50°F (10°C), the tire pres-

sure will change 0.1 bar (2 psi).

Never reduce the pressure of a hot tire. If the

tires are hot when you check them, only

increase the pressure, if necessary.

WARNING

Poorly maintained and improperly used

tires are dangerous.

• Overloading your tires can cause

overheating as a result of too much

friction. You could have an blow-out

and a serious accident. See “Loading

Your Vehicle” on page 231.

• Underinflated tires pose the same

danger as overloaded tires. The

resulting accident could cause serious

injury. Check all tires frequently to

maintain the recommended pressure.

Tire pressure should be checked

when your tires are cold.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to be

cut, punctured or broken by a sudden

impact – such as when you hit a pot-

hole. Keep tires at the recommended

pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If

your tread is badly worn, or if your tires

have been damaged, replace them.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 222 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

223Car care and technical information

High speed operation When to check

Check your tires once a month or more.

Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It

should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to

check tire pressure. You can’t tell if your

tires are properly inflated simply by looking

at them. Radial tires may look properly

inflated even when they’re underinflated.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the

valve stems. They help prevent leaks by

keeping out dirt and moisture.

Tire Inspection and Rotation

Tires should be rotated every 10,000 miles

(16 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate

your tires as soon as possible and check

wheel alignment. Also check for damaged

tires or wheels. See “When It Is Time for

New Tires” on page 224 and “Wheel

Replacement” on page 227 for more infor-

mation.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve

more uniform wear for all tires on the vehi-

cle. The first rotation is the most important.

When rotating your tires, always use the

correct rotation pattern. Left front tire to left

rear. Left rear tire to right front. Right front to

right rear. Right rear to left front.

Don’t include the compact spare tire in your

tire rotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the

front and rear inflation pressures as shown

on the Tire-Loading Information label. Make

certain that all wheel nuts are properly tight-

ened. See page 238.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds, 100 mph

(160 km/h) or higher, puts an additional

strain on tires.

Sustained high-speed driving causes

excessive heat build up and can cause

sudden tire failure. You could have a

crash and you or others could be killed.

Some high-speed rated tires require infla-

tion pressure adjustment for high speed

operation. When speed limits and road

conditions are such that a vehicle can be

driven at high speeds, make sure the tires

are rated for high speed operation, in

excellent condition, and set to the correct

cold tire inflation pressure for the vehicle

load.

WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to

which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts

become loose after a time. The wheel

could come off and cause an accident.

When you change a wheel, remove any

rust or dirt from places where the wheel

attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,

you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do

this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire

brush later, if you need to, to get all the

rust or dirt off. See “Changing a wheel” on

page 236.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 223 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

224 Car care and technical information

Flat spotting

All tires get hot, especially on long journeys

or when the car is driven hard. After the car

has been parked with hot tires and the tires

have cooled down, a flat spot can form in the

tire, where it is in contact with the ground.

The same can occur if the car has not been

moved for a long time.

Flat spots can cause vibration that can be

felt through the steering wheel, similar to

that experienced when the wheels need bal-

ancing.

Flat spots of this type disappear once the

tires get hot again, usually after 10–15 miles

(20–25 km) of driving at cruising speed.

When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when it’s time for new tires is

to check the treadwear indicators, which will

appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch

(1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.

You need a new tire if any of the following

statements are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or

more places around the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing

through the tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or

snagged deep enough to show cord or

fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut or other

damage that can’t be repaired well

because of the size or location of the

damage.

Treadwear indicators

The tires incorporate wear indicators in the

form of smooth, treadless strips across the

width, which become visible when only

2/32" (1.6 mm) of tread remains. As soon as

the indicators become visible, new tires

should be fitted without delay.

Make sure you are familiar with the legal

limit for minimum tread depth in your

country and also any regulations gov-

erning the use of winter (snow) tires.

SG840

Wear indicators

95_U S_M 07.book Page 224 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

225Car care and technical information

Buying New Tires

To find out what kind and size of tires you

need, look at the Tire-Loading Information

label.

Before changing to wheels/tires of another

size, we recommend that you contact an

authorized Saab workshop regarding

acceptable options. See also page 266

Wheels/tires combinations that are not

approved by the vehicle manufacturer can

negatively affect the car’s directional stabil-

ity, steering and braking in both wet and dry

conditions.

The wheels and tires have been carefully

matched to the characteristics of the car and

play a key role in its outstanding roadhold-

ing and handling.

Do not take it for granted that a wheel/tire

combination will work in the best possible

way, just because it can be fitted to the car.

To ensure that the speedometer is as accu-

rate as possible it should be reprogrammed

if wheels of a different dimension are fitted.

Contact a Saab dealer.

Because of front wheel drive, the front tires

tend to wear faster than the rear ones. New

tires should always be fitted in pairs, so that

tires on the same axle have the same

amount of tread.

Store wheels lying flat or hanging – never

standing upright.

NOTICE

Wide wheels and tires with sidewalls that

are too low can:

• be damaged in potholes etc.

• cause springs, shock absorbers and

wheel bearings and body mountings

can be overloaded.

• cause the wheels to come into contact

with chassis and body components.

• can affect the function of the Elec-

tronic Stability Program (ESP®).

The speed and load limits for the tires

must not be exceeded; see page 230.

Wheels larger than 17” must not be fitted.

The maximum permissible offset is

49 mm.

WARNING

Mixing tires could cause you to lose con-

trol while driving. If you mix tires of differ-

ent sizes or types (radial and bias-belted

tires), the vehicle may not handle prop-

erly, and you could have a crash. Using

tires of different sizes may also cause

damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use

the same size and type tires on all wheels.

It’s all right to drive with your compact

spare temporarily, it was developed for

use on your vehicle. See “Compact spare

tire” on page 234.

WARNING

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,

the wheel rim flanges could develop

cracks after many miles of driving. A tire

and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing

a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the

wheels on your vehicle.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 225 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

226 Car care and technical information

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applica-

ble on the tire sidewall between tread shoul-

der and maximum section width. For exam-

ple:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA

Temperature A

The following information relates to the

system developed by the United States

National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-

tion, which grades tires by treadwear, trac-

tion and temperature performance. (This

applies only to vehicles sold in the United

States.) The grades are molded on the side-

walls of most passenger car tires. The Uni-

form Tire Quality Grading system does not

apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,

space-saver or temporary use spare tires,

tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12

inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-pro-

duction tires.

While the tires available on General Motors

passenger cars and light trucks may vary

with respect to these grades, they must also

conform to federal safety requirements and

additional General Motors Tire Perfor-

mance Criteria (TPC) standards.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative

rating based on the wear rate of the tire

when tested under controlled conditions on

a specified government test course. For

example, a tire graded 150 would wear one

and a half (1.5) times as well on the govern-

ment course as a tire graded 100. The rela-

tive performance of tires depends upon the

actual conditions of their use, however, and

may depart significantly from the norm due

to variations in driving habits, service prac-

tices and differences in road characteristics

and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,

are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-

sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-

ment as measured under controlled condi-

tions on specified government test surfaces

of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C

may have poor traction performance. Warn-

ing: The traction grade assigned to this tire

is based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction

characteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest),

B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance

to the generation of heat and its ability to dis-

sipate heat when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel. Sustained high temperature can

cause the material of the tire to degenerate

and reduce tire life, and excessive temper-

ature can lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-

mance which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of performance on

the laboratory test wheel than the minimum

required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire

is established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Excessive

speed, underinflation, or excessive loading,

either separately or in combination, can

cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 226 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

227Car care and technical information

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance

The wheels on your vehicle were aligned

and balanced carefully at the factory to give

you the longest tire life and best overall per-

formance.

Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel bal-

ancing are not needed. However, if you

notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pull-

ing one way or the other, the alignment may

need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle

vibrating when driving on a smooth road,

your wheels may need to be rebalanced.

Wheel Replacement

Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or

badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep

coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and

wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel

leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum

wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).

See your dealer if any of these conditions

exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you

need.

Each new wheel should have the same

load-carrying capacity, diameter, width,

offset and be mounted the same way as the

one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels,

wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only

with new Saab original equipment parts.

This way, you will be sure to have the right

wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your

vehicle.

Notice:

The wrong wheel can also cause

problems with bearing life, brake cool-

ing, speedometer or odometer calibra-

tion, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehi-

cle ground clearance and tire or tire

chain clearance to the body and chassis.

See “Changing a wheel” on page 236.

Used Replacement Wheels

WARNING

Using the wrong replacement wheels,

wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle

can be dangerous. It could affect the

braking and handling of your vehicle,

make your tires lose air and make you

lose control. You could have a collision in

which you or others could be injured.

Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts

and wheel nuts for replacement.

WARNING

When fitting just one new pair of tires,

these should be fitted to the rear wheels,

as these are more critical to the direc-

tional stability of the car (e.g. on braking

or in a skid). The existing rear wheels

should therefore be moved to the front.

WARNING

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is

dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been

used or how far it’s been driven. It could

fail suddenly and cause a crash. If you

have to replace a wheel, use a new GM

original equipment wheel.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 227 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

228 Car care and technical information

Tire Chains

Notice:

If your vehicle does not have

225/45R17 alt. 235/45 R17 size tires, use

tire chains only where legal and only

when you must. Contact your Saab

dealer regarding suitable snow chains.

Install them on the front tires and tighten

them as tightly as possible with the ends

securely fastened. Drive slowly and

follow the chain manufacturer’s instruc-

tions. If you can hear the chains contact-

ing your vehicle, stop and retighten

them. If the contact continues, slow

down until it stops. Driving too fast or

spinning the wheels with chains on will

damage your vehicle.

If a Tire Goes Flat

It’s unusual for a tire to “blow-out” while

you’re driving, especially if you maintain

your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire,

it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. But

if you should ever have a “blow-out”, here

are a few tips about what to expect and what

to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a

drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side.

Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and

grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to main-

tain lane position, and then gently brake to

a stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blow-out, particularly on a curve, acts

much like a skid and may require the same

correction you’d use in a skid. In any rear

blowout, remove your foot from the acceler-

ator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by

steering the way you want the vehicle to go.

It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can

still steer. Gently brake to a stop – well off

the road if possible.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to

use your jacking equipment to change a flat

tire safely.

WARNING

If your vehicle has 225/45 R17 alt. 235/45

R17 size tires, don’t use tire chains,

there’s not enough clearance.

Tire chains used on a vehicle without the

proper amount of clearance can cause

damage to the brakes, suspension or

other vehicle parts. The area damaged by

the tire chains could cause you to lose

control of your vehicle and you or others

may be injured in a crash.

Use another type of traction device only if

its manufacturer recommends it for use

on your vehicle and tire size combination

and road conditions. Follow that manu-

facturer’s instructions. To help avoid

damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,

readjust or remove the device if it’s con-

tacting your vehicle, and don’t spin your

wheels.

If you do find traction devices that will fit,

install them on the front tires.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 228 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

229Car care and technical information

Tire Sidewall Labeling

Useful information about a tire is molded

into it´s sidewall.

Tire size: The tire size ia a combination of

letters and numbers used to define a partic-

ular tire´s width, height, aspect ratio, con-

struction type and service description.

Department of Transportation (DOT):

The Department of Transportation (DOT)

code indicates that the tire is in compliance

with the U.S. Department of Transportation

Motor Vehicle Safety standards.

Tire Identification Number (TIN): The let-

ters and numbers following DOT code are

the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The

TIN shows the manufacturer and plant

code, tire size, and date the tire was manu-

factured. The TIN is molded onto both sides

of the tire.

Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and

number of plies in the sidewall and under

the tread.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):

Tire manufacturers are required to grade

tires based on performance factors: tread-

wear, traction and temperature resistance.

For more information see “Uniform Tire

Quality Grading” on page 226.

Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Max-

imum load that can be carried and the max-

imum pressure needed to support that load.

For information on recommended tire pres-

sure see “Lowest recommended tire pres-

sure, cold tires” on page 267and “Loading

Your Vehicle” on page 231.

Tire Size

The following illustration shows an example

of a typical passenger car tire size.

Tire Width: The three-digit number indi-

cates the tire section width in millimeters

from sidewall to sidewall.

215 /55 R 16 93 H

| |||||

abcdef

aTire Width

b Aspect Ratio

c Belt Rating

d Rim diameter

e Load range

f Speed rating

95_U S_M 07.book Page 229 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

230 Car care and technical information

Aspect ratio: A two-digit number that indi-

cates the tire height-to-width measure-

ments. For example, if the tire size aspect

ratio is “55”, as shown in item “C” of the illus-

tration, it would mean that the tire´s sidewall

is 55% as high as it is wide.

Belt Rating: A letter code is used to indicate

the type of ply construction in the tire. The

letter “R” means radial ply construction; the

letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply con-

struction; and the letter “B” means

belted-bias ply construction.

Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in

inches.

Load range: The load range represents the

load carry capacity a tire is certified to carry.

Speed Rating: The maximum speed that a

tire is certified to carry a load. Speed ratings

range from “A” to “Z”.

Tire markings

An example of the meaning of the different

markings in a tire size is given below for a

tire size of:

215/55 R16 93 V

215 Tire section width, mm

55 Aspect ratio, i.e. the section height

is 55 % of the section width

R Radial ply

16 Wheel rim diameter 16 in at bead

seats

93 Tire load code

V Speed marking

Tire load index

91 Tire approved for max. 1355 lbs.

(615 kg)

93 Max. 1433 lbs (650 kg)

94 Max. 1477 lbs (670 kg)

Speed ratings

Q Tire approved for speeds up to

100 mph (160 km/h)

S Max. 112 mph (180 km/h)

T Max. 118 mph (190 km/h)

H Max. 130 mph (210 km/h)

V Max. 150 mph (240 km/h)

W Max. 167 mph (270 km/h)

Y Max. 186 mph (300 km/h)

TIN-code

a Manufacturer´s Identification Mark

b Tire Size

c Tire Type Code

d Date of Manufacture

95_U S_M 07.book Page 230 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

231Car care and technical information

Loading Your Vehicle

This is an example of what your vehicle´s

Tire-Loading Information/Certification label

might look like. It is located on the B-pillar

and shows how much weight your vehicle

may properly carry. The label tells you the

proper size, and recommended inflation

pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It

also gives you important information about

the number of people that can be in your

vehicle and the total weight that you can

carry. This weight is called the Vehicle

Capacity Weight, and includes the weight of

all occupants, cargo and all nonfac-

tory-installed options.

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the

tire pressing outward on each square inch of

the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds

per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the com-

bined weight of optional accessories, for

example, automatic transmission, power

steering, power brakes, power windows,

power seats, radio and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire´s

height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is

located between the plies and the tread.

Cords may be made from steel or other rein-

forcing materials.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the

ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at

alternate angles substantially less than 90

degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air

pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per

square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa), before

a tire have built up heat from driving. See

“Inflation - Tire Pressure” on page 222.

Curb weight: This means the weight of a

motor vehicle with standard and optional

equipment including the maximum capacity

of fuel, oil and coolant, without passengers

and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the

sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in

compliance with the U.S. Department of

Transportation motor vehicle safety stan-

dards. The DOT code includes the Tire

Identification Number (TIN), an alphanu-

meric designator which can also identify the

tire manufacturer, production plant, brand

and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see

“Loading Your Vehicle” on page 231.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for

the front axle, see “Loading Your Vehicle”

on page 231.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for

the rear axle, see “Loading Your Vehicle” on

page 231.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of

an asymmetrical tire that must always face

outward when mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air

pressure. There are 6.9 kPa to one psi.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used

on light duty trucks and some multipurpose

passenger vehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging

from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load

carrying capacity of a tire.

This label can only be found on vehicles

sold in the U.S.

Vehicles sold in Canada have the tire

information label in the glovebox, see

page 268.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 231 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

232 Car care and technical information

Maximum Load rating: The load rating for

a tire at the maximum permissible inflation

pressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The

sum of curb weight; accessory weight; vehi-

cle capacity weight; and production options

weight.

Maximum Permissible Inflation Pres-

sure: The maximum cold inflation pressure

to which a tire may be inflated.

Normal occupant weight: The number of

occupants a vehicle is designed to seat mul-

tipled by 150 pounds (68 kg). See “Loading

Your Vehicle” on page 231.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seat-

ing positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a

asymmetrical tire that has a particular side

that faces outward when mounted on a vehi-

cle. The side of the tire that contains a white-

wall bears white lettering or bears manufac-

turer, brand and or model name molding on

the other sidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on

passenger cars and some light duty trucks

and multipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehi-

cle manufacturer´s recommended tire infla-

tion pressure shown on the tire label, see

“Inflation - Tire Pressure” on page 222 and

“Loading Your Vehicle” on page 231.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which

the ply cords that extend to the beads are

laid at substantially 90 degrees to the cen-

terline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire or a tire and

tube assembly upon which the tire beads

are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the

tread and the bead.

Speed rating: An alphanumeric code

assigned to a tire indicating the maximum

speed at which a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and

the road surface. The amount of grip pro-

vided.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands,

sometimes called “wear bars”, that show

across the tread of a tire when only

2/32 inch of tread remains. See “When It Is

Time for New Tires” on page 224.

Tread Width: The width of the tire´s tread.

UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grade Stan-

dards, a tire information system that pro-

vides consumers with ratings for a tire´s

traction, temperature and treadwear. Rat-

ings are determined by tire manufacturers

using government testing procedures. The

rating are molded into the sidewall of the

tire. See “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” on

page 226.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Is the number of

designated seating positions multipled by

150 pounds (68 kg) plus the rated cargo

load. See “Loading Your Vehicle” on

page 231.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load

on an individual tire due to curb weight,

accessory weight, occupant weight and

cargo weight.

Vehicle label: A label permanently

attached to a vehicle showing original

equipment tire size and the recommended

cold inflation pressure. See “Loading Your

Vehicle” on page 231.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 232 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

233Car care and technical information

Steps for Determining Correct

Load Limit

1 Locate the statement “The

combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed

XXX pounds” on your vehicle´s

label.

2 Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will

be riding in your vehicle.

3 Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from

XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

4 The resulting figure equals the avail-

able amount of cargo and luggage

load capacity. For example, if the

“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and

there will be five 150 lb. passengers

in your vehicle, the amount of avail-

able cargo and luggage load capac-

ity is 650 lbs. (1400–750 (5x150) =

650 lbs.).

5 Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo

and luggage load capacity calcu-

lated in Step 4.

6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,

load from your trailer will be trans-

ferred to your vehicle. Consult this

manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your vehi-

cle.

Winter tires

Winter (snow) tires are recommended for

winter climates where the majority of your

driving will be done on snow and ice. Winter

tires should be fitted to all four wheels to

maintain a proper balance. Your Saab

dealer can advise you of to the correct size

tire for your car (if different from the original

size) and also supply Saab approved winter

tires pre-mounted on steel or alloy rims.

Winter tires normally use a different speed

rating compared to summer/all season tires.

Make sure not to exceed the stated speed

rating on the tires you use.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 233 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

234 Car care and technical information

Tire date code

Tires should be regarded as perishable

goods. As the tires age, the rubber becomes

progressively harder, and the roadholding

ability of the tires diminishes. This is partic-

ularly true on winter tires.

Tires now have a date-code marking for the

year of manufacture. The first two digits

denote the week number and the two last

digits the year followed by a filled triangle.

Compact spare tire

The compact spare is light and easy to

handle when changing the tire. Its use is

only permitted when a standard tire has sus-

tained a puncture. The maximum life of the

tire is only 2000 miles (3,500 km).

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with the

compact spare fitted.

The compact spare should be inflated to

60 psi (420 kPa). Carry the punctured tire in

the spare-wheel well under the luggage-

compartment floor.

Have the standard tire repaired and refitted

as soon as possible.

The spare tire, together with the jack, front

towrope attachment eye and toolkit, is

stowed away underneath the luggage-com-

partment floor.

WARNING

Stow all tools carefully away after use, so

that they cannot get loose and cause

injury in the event of a crash.

NOTICE

To avoid damaging a punctured alloy

wheel it can be placed outside up in the

spare-wheel well but only while driving to

the closest dealer.

A general rule is that all heavy loads must

be well secured in the luggage compart-

ment, see page 131 and 135.

IB3233

Spare wheel (under panel in luggage

compartment)

95_U S_M 07.book Page 234 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

235Car care and technical information

Driving considerations with

compact spare wheel/tire fitted

The following should be observed when the

compact spare wheel (T115/70 R16) is

fitted:

• The compact spare is light and easy to

handle when changing the wheel.

• Do not drive further than necessary with

the compact spare fitted – the maximum

life of the wheel is only just over

2000 miles (3,500 km).

• Refit the standard tire as soon as possi-

ble.

Important considerations when driving with

a compact spare tire:

• The car’s ground clearance is reduced.

• The car must not be driven with more than

one compact tire at a time.

• Avoid driving against a curb.

• Do not use snow chains.

• Do not fit the wheel cover - this would con-

ceal the warning text.

WARNING

• Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) as

the tire can overheat and adversely

affect the handling of the car.

• Tire pressure: refer to page 267.

• The spare wheel or punctured tire

must be stowed under the trunk floor,

and secured in place with the retaining

nut.

IB3234

Hanging up the cover, 9-5 SportCombi

95_U S_M 07.book Page 235 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

236 Car care and technical information

Changing a wheel

WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do

maintenance or repairs is dangerous

without the appropriate safety equipment

and training. The jack provided with your

vehicle is designed only for changing a

flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you

or others could be badly injured or killed if

the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the jack

provided with your vehicle only for chang-

ing a flat tire.

Changing a tire can be dangerous. The

vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over

or fall on you or other people. You and

they could be badly injured or even killed.

Find a level place to change your tire. To

help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1 Set the parking brake firmly.

2 If you have an automatic transmis-

sion, put the shift lever in PARK (P).

For a manual transmission, leave the

car in gear (1st or REVERSE (R)).

3 Turn off the engine and do not restart

while the vehicle is raised.

4 Do not allow passengers to remain in

the vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle won't

move, you should put blocks at the front

and rear of the tire farthest away from the

one being changed. That would be the

tire, on the other side, at the opposite end

of the vehicle.

• The car jack is designed solely for use

in changing a wheel or fitting snow

chains. It must not be used to sup-

port the car during repair work or

servicing.

•Never crawl under a car that is

supported only by a jack.

• Raising your vehicle too high or with

the jack improperly positioned can

damage the vehicle and even make

the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal

injury and vehicle damage, be sure to

fit the jack lift head into the proper

location before raising the vehicle, and

raise the vehicle only far enough off

the ground so there is enough room

for the spare tire to fit (no more than

25 mm or 1 inch clearance between

the ground and the bottom of the tire).

• Switch on the hazard warning lights if

the car is on a road.

• The jack should be stored correctly

under the carpeting in the trunk. If it

lies loose in the car, it could thrown for-

ward and cause personal injury in the

event of a crash or if the car rolls over.

• Grit, salt and rust can clog the inner

threads of the wheel bolts if the car has

been driven for several years exclu-

sively with alloy wheels.

If steel wheels are being installed, the

bolt hole threads in the brake hubs

should be cleaned before the thinner

steel wheels are fitted. It may other-

wise not be possible to achieve the

correct clamping force, despite tight-

ening the wheel bolts to the correct

torque.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 236 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

237Car care and technical information

To jack up the car, apply the jack to one of

the special jacking points under the sills.

If a floor jack is used, it can be applied to the

standard jacking points used by the dealer.

A floor jack can lift both front wheels or both

rear wheels off the ground simultaneously.

A jack stand must then be applied under-

neath the front of the engine subframe (at

the fixing point for the towrope-attachment

eye) or to the rear towrope-attachment eye

(or under the trailer hitch, if fitted).

1 Put the car in 1st gear (automatic trans-

mission: move selector to the P position)

and apply the parking brake.

2 Wind the jack up to a suitable height

before placing it under the recess in the

sill.

Make sure that the jack fully engages

the recess in the sill and that the base of

the jack is steady and flat on the ground.

3 Remove the wheel cover (where appli-

cable).

Remove the wheel bolt caps and loosen

the wheel bolts by half a turn.

4 Wind the jack to raise the wheel clear of

the ground. Remove the wheel bolts and

lift off the wheel.

NOTICE

Apply the jack only to the jacking points

indicated on the body.

Position for jack

IB3917

IB1130

Jacking points for a floor jack

95_U S_M 07.book Page 237 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

238 Car care and technical information

5 Clean any rust or dirt from the contact

surfaces between the wheel and brake

disc. Do not wipe away the grease in the

hub.

6 Fit the wheel and screw in the bolts in the

sequence shown (opposite pairs) - see

page 239.

Tighten the bolts enough for the bolts

and wheel to be seated correctly.

7 Lower the car and tighten the wheel

bolts to the correct torque in the

sequence shown (opposite

pairs).Replace the wheel bolt caps.

Tightening torque

Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)

Steel wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm).

8 Check-tighten the wheel bolts after a

few miles.

Tightening torque

Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)

Steel wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)

NOTICE

• When refitting wheel covers (where

applicable), make sure that the valve

protrudes through the marked hole in

the wheel cover.

• Do not overtighten the bolts using an

impact wrench: not only can this

damage the wheels but it can also

make it impossible to undo the bolts

using the wheel wrench in the car’s

toolkit.

Clean any rust or dirt from the contact sur-

faces between the wheel and brake disc

IB2428

Do not wipe away the grease in the hub.

IB4529

Removing the plastic wheel bolt caps

95_U S_M 07.book Page 238 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

239Car care and technical information

Safety belts

Regularly check the function of the safety

belts as follows:

• Hold the diagonal strap and pull it sharply.

The safety belt should lock and it should

not be possible to withdraw it further.

Check the anchorage points in the floor.

They must not have suffered rust damage.

There must be no frayed threads in the web-

bing.

Safety belts must not come into contact with

substances such as polishes, oils or other

chemicals. If the straps are dirty, wash them

with warm water and a detergent or have

them replaced.

WARNING

If the car is involved in a crash, the safety

belts, belt pretensioners and other com-

ponents must be inspected by a work-

shop. We recommend that you contact an

authorized Saab dealer.

Never make any alterations or repairs to

the safety belt yourself.

IB1800

Removing the wheel cover

IB539

Tightening sequence, wheel bolts

95_U S_M 07.book Page 239 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

240 Car care and technical information

Upholstery and trim

To remove lint or hairs from the seat uphol-

stery or headlining, use a moist, lint-free

cloth or a special lint remover (brush or

roller). Remove any dirty marks using a

cloth moistened with lukewarm soapy

water.

When using a stain remover, always work

from the outside towards the center to avoid

leaving a ring. If a soiled ring or spot should

remain, it can usually be removed using

lukewarm soapy water or water alone.

Wet patches left by spilled soft drinks or thin

oil must be wiped off immediately using an

absorbent material, such as a paper towel,

and treated with stain remover.

Alcohol is recommended for removing

grease or oil stains, and a semi-stiff brush

may also be used.

Cleaning and caring for leather

upholstery

The principal reason for treating leather

upholstery is to maintain its elegant appear-

ance and to provide it with a protective film.

Discoloration caused by dust and wear

mainly affects the lighter shades, although

this is not detrimental to the leather –

indeed, the patina resulting from use is often

considered desirable in leather. But if the

leather is allowed to become too grubby, it

can start to look shabby.

It is a good idea to clean and recondition the

leather twice a year – in conjunction with a

general spring-cleaning of the car – after the

winter and in the autumn, for instance. In

hot, dry climates, the leather will need to be

treated more frequently. Use conventional

leather care products. Follow the instruc-

tions on the packaging.

Do not use harsh polishing agents, cleaning

agents, sprays, coarse soap or hot water.

Textile carpeting

Vacuum clean the carpeting regularly. Car-

pets can also be cleaned using a brush, or

carpet shampoo applied with a sponge. Do

not use vacuum cleaners outdoors unless

they are properly grounded.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 240 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

241Car care and technical information

Washing the car

Wash your car frequently. To facilitate

cleaning, a suitable detergent can be added

to the water, which should be lukewarm.

Saab offers a full line of car care products,

including car wash, for the care of your vehi-

cle. See your dealer for available products

or visit www.saabcatalog.com (U.S. resi-

dents only).

Do not use a pressure washer at close

range on stone chip damage, scratches or

other damage to the paintwork. The paint

can otherwise start to flake.

Remove any bird droppings without delay,

as these can discolor the paintwork and

prove difficult to polish out.

Use a soft cloth moistened with methyl alco-

hol to remove splashes of tar or asphalt. Do

not use strong cleaners, as these can dry

out the paintwork.

The underside of the car also needs wash-

ing regularly, and this should be done extra

thoroughly at the end of winter. Clean the

underside of the car by hand if the car is usu-

ally washed in an automatic car wash with-

out special facilities for underbody cleaning.

Never wash or leave the car to dry in the

sun, but wipe it dry with a chamois leather

immediately after washing to avoid smears

and streaks.

Clean the window glass inside and out using

a high quality window cleaner. This is partic-

ularly important when the car is new, as

upholstery and trim have a tendency to

sweat a little at first.

Keep the glass well cleaned, as this helps to

prevent misting.

NOTICE

Avoid using any alcohol-based cleaners

on the front and rear light clusters, as

these can cause cracking of the lenses.

NOTICE

• The door mirrors must be fully

retracted before the car enters an

automatic car wash.

• Remove fixed antennas, e.g. for

mobile phone, before putting car

through an automatic car wash.

• Try your brakes on leaving a car wash.

Wet brake discs may reduce the per-

formance of the brakes.

• Cars with Saab Parking Assistance:

Do not spray the sensors or closer

than 8 in. (20 cm) to the sensors with

a pressure washer, as this can

damage them.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 241 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

242 Car care and technical information

Waxing and polishing

Other than in exceptional cases, do not use

abrasive polishes containing a cutting agent

on a new car. Always wash the car thor-

oughly before waxing or polishing.

Engine compartment

Clean the engine compartment using an

engine detergent and rinse with hot water.

Cover the headlights. Do not use high-pres-

sure washer. Avoid spraying the hood liner,

as this can become heavy and hang down

and touch the engine when the hood is

closed.

Do not use gasoline as a cleaning agent or

solvent when carrying out repairs or mainte-

nance. Saab recommends the use of envi-

ronmentally safe degreasing agents.

Touching up the paint

Damaged paintwork should be treated as

soon as it is discovered: the longer it is left,

the greater the risk of corrosion. The

anti-perforation warranty does not cover

corrosion resulting from untreated defects.

Paintwork damage sustained in a crash is

usually extensive and can only be properly

restored by professionals.

However, you can repair small scratches

and stone-chip damage yourself. The nec-

essary tools and materials, such as primer,

touch-up paint and brushes, are available

from your Saab dealer.

In the case of minor flaws in the paintwork,

where the metal has not been exposed and

an undamaged layer of paint remains,

touch-up paint can usually be applied

directly, after any dirt has been scraped

away using a pointed knife.

If corrosion has already set in, e.g. as a

result of stone-chip damage, use a pointed

knife to scrape off all surface rust. If possi-

ble, the damaged area should be taken

back to the bare metal. The metal should

then be primed with two thin coats of primer

applied by brush.

After the primer has dried, apply several thin

layers of topcoat enamel until the surface of

the repaired area is flush with the surround-

ing paintwork.

Stir both primer and touch-up enamel thor-

oughly before use and allow each coat to

dry before applying the next.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 242 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

243Car care and technical information

Two-coat enamel

As the name implies, two-coat enamel is

applied in two operations. The first coat, the

base color, contains the pigment, metal

flakes and binder. The second coat consists

of a clear enamel, which provides the final

gloss for the paintwork and protects the

base from moisture and environmental con-

taminants.

Touch-up stone-chip damage as follows:

1 Thoroughly clean the damaged area.

2 Apply the primer, base color and finally,

the enamel. To achieve the best finish,

apply two or three coats of primer.

Air conditioning

(ACC)

WARNING

• All repairs and adjustments on the A/C

system must be carried out by a work-

shop authorized for this kind of work.

• The A/C system is pressurized. Do not

break any connections or undo A/C

system components.

• Escaping refrigerant gas can cause

visual impairment or other injury.

NOTICE

• The A/C system is designed for use

with R134a refrigerant.

• Refrigerant handling requires special

equipment and special procedures for

charging and draining the system.

• Never mix R134a and R12 refriger-

ants.

IB1334

Surface-treatment composition

1 Body panel

2 Zinc (certain panel sections only) 7.5 µm

3 Phosphate coating

4 Cathodic ED 23 µm

5 Intermediate coat 35 µm

6 Metallic base 15 µm

7 Clear enamel /solid enamel 40 µm

95_U S_M 07.book Page 243 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

244 Car care and technical information

Fault diagnosis

If a fault occurs in the A/C system, there are

a number of checks you can perform your-

self. If the fault persists, however, have the

system checked by a workshop. We recom-

mend that you contact an authorized Saab

dealer.

Important!

When the A/C system is running, the intake

air is dehumidified, and the resultant con-

densation is drained off through two outlets

underneath the floor of the car in the vicinity

of the front doors. It is therefore perfectly

normal for water to be seen dripping from

these outlets when the car is parked. The

warmer the ambient air and the higher the

humidity, the greater will be the amount of

condensation formed.

Inadequate cooling:

a Check that the condenser (forward of

the radiator) has not become clogged

with dirt and insects.

b Make sure that the drive belt for the com-

pressor is not slipping.

c Check the fuses for the ventilation fans

and compressor.

Maintenance

• The drive belt for the compressor should

be inspected under the regular service

program.

• Clean dirt and insects away from the con-

denser and radiator to prevent clogging.

When washing the car, use the hose to

spray the radiator and condenser (located

forward of the radiator) from both sides

(both from the front of the car and from

inside the engine bay). Do not use a pres-

sure washer.

Caution: Do not use the hose when the

engine is hot.

Other than in extremely cold weather, do not

screen the radiator, e.g. with netting, as this

will greatly diminish its cooling capacity.

Note: The A/C system will only operate

when the outdoor temperature is above the

freezing point (0°C, 32°F).

95_U S_M 07.book Page 244 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

245Car care and technical information

Anti-corrosion

treatment

The entire car is corrosion-protected at the

factory in different stages by an electrolytic

immersion coating and a PVC-based pro-

tective coating to protect against corrosion

caused by stones flung up by the wheels. A

thin penetrating anti-rust oil is also applied

in cavities and body members.

In addition to conventional anti-corrosion

treatment like painting, underbody treat-

ment and cavity treatment, most of the body

panel surfaces are galvanized. These

include the hood, the doors and the under-

body.

The anti-corrosion treatment on the under-

side of the car and inside the wheel arches

is particularly exposed to constant wear and

possible damage, the degree of which will

obviously depend on driving conditions.

What causes rust?

Steel body panels of automobiles are sub-

ject to rusting whenever air and moisture

manage to penetrate the protective finish,

and body panels may rust through if the pro-

cess is unchecked. Rusting can occur wher-

ever water is trapped or where the car’s

panels are continuously damp. Damage to

paint and undercoating by stones, gravel

and minor crashes immediately exposes

metal to air and moisture. Road salts used

for de-icing will collect on the bottom of the

car and promote rusting. Areas of the coun-

try with high humidity have great potential

for rust problems, especially where salt is

used on roads or there is moist sea air.

Industrial pollution (fallout) may also

damage paint and promote rusting.

Preventive maintenance

The following procedures are necessary to

help protect against rusting. Refer also to

the terms and conditions of the Sheet Metal

Coverage described in the warranty book-

let.

1Wash the car frequently, and wax at

least twice a year. Under adverse con-

ditions, where there is a rapid buildup of

dirt, sand or road salt, wash your car at

least once a week. After extreme expo-

sure to salted snow or slush, evidenced

by a white film on the car, wash the car

immediately. Frequent washing will pre-

vent paint damage from acid rain and

other airborne contaminants such as

tree sap and bird droppings. If any of

these contaminants are noticed on the

car the finish should be washed immedi-

ately.

• Begin washing by rinsing the entire car

with water to loosen and flush off heavy

concentrations of dirt (include the

underbody).

• Sponge the car with a solution of either

a good quality car soap or mild general

purpose (dish washing) detergent and

water.

• Rinse car thoroughly with clean water.

• After washing, check and clear all

drains in doors and body panels.

• Wipe the car dry, preferably using a

chamois.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 245 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

246 Car care and technical information

2Clean the underside of the car during

the winter. Use high pressure water to

clean the car’s underside (floor panels,

wheel wells) at least at mid- winter and

in the spring.

3Inspect the car frequently for leaks or

damage, and arrange for needed

repairs promptly. After washing or after

heavy rain, check for leaks. When wash-

ing the car inspect body surfaces for

paint damage. While checking for leaks,

lift the floor mats and check beneath

them. Water can collect in these areas

and remain for prolonged periods. Dry

any wet areas including the floor mats.

Have leaks repaired as soon as possi-

ble.

Use touch-up paint to repair small

scratches or minor finish damage. Areas

where metal is exposed will rust quickly

and MUST be repaired immediately by

touch-up or professional repainting.

Rust must be removed, the bare metal

primed and painted. Major body

damage should be repaired immediately

and new panels or exposed areas

should be undercoated with anti- corro-

sion material.

Repairs of this type are the owner’s

responsibility and are not covered under

warranty.

4Inspect the undercoating and touch

up if necessary. Pay particular atten-

tion to the fenders and wheel housings,

which are exposed to abrasion by flying

gravel, etc. If the composition has worn

or flaked off, the steel must be thor-

oughly cleaned and dried before a fresh

coat is applied. The cleaning is best

done with a scraper and a steel wire

brush, followed by washing with solvent.

Apply the new coating thinly, as other-

wise it may run off or fall off when dry.

For long trips

Before setting off on a long journey, it is

advisable to have your car checked over by

your Saab dealer.

Obtain a few important items to take along

on your journey such as spare bulbs, wiper

blades, fuses, a Poly-V-belt and the like.

You can check some points yourself before-

hand:

• Make sure that the engine is in good con-

dition.

• Check that no oil or gasoline leaks out of

the engine or gearbox/transmission.

• Check the coolant and power steering

fluid levels. Check also for leaks.

• Inspect the Poly-V-belt and replace it if it

shows any signs of hard wear.

• Check the battery charge.

• Check the tires for tread pattern and air

pressure, including the compact spare

wheel.

• Check the brakes.

• Check all bulbs.

• Check for the presence of the tool kit and

the jack in the car.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 246 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

247Car care and technical information

Recovery and/or

recycling of automotive

materials

Information on the scrapping and recycling

of car materials is available on

www.saab.com.

Headlight aiming

The vehicle has a visual optical headlight

aiming system equipped with vertical

aiming device. The aim has been preset at

the factory and should normally not need

further adjustments.

If your headlights are damaged in a crash,

the headlight aim may be affected. If you

believe your headlights need to be

re-aimed, we recommend that you take it to

your Saab dealer for service, however, it is

possible for you to re-aim your headlights as

described in the following procedure.

To check the aim, the vehicle should be

properly prepared as follows:

• The vehicle shall be placed so that the

headlights are 25 ft (7.6 m) from a light

colored wall or other flat surface. The

aiming area should be darkened, this will

improve your ability to see the beam of the

low beam headlight being aimed.

• The vehicle must have all four wheels on

a perfectly level surface which is level all

the way to the wall or other flat surface.

• The vehicle should be placed so it is per-

pendicular to the wall or other flat surface.

• The vehicle should be unloaded and fuel

tank full, and one person or 160 lbs.

(75 kg) on the drivers seat.

WARNING

Before checking/adjusting the headlight

aiming, switch off the engine to avoid

danger of fingers and hands being injured

by moving parts.

The radiator fan can start up even when

the engine is switched off.

NOTICE

To make sure that your headlights are

aimed properly read all instructions

before beginning. Failure to follow these

instructions could cause damage to

headlight parts or a not correctly aimed

headlight.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 247 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

248 Car care and technical information

• The vehicle should be fully assembled

and all other work stopped while headlight

aiming is being done.

• The vehicle should not have any snow,

ice or mud attached to it.

• Tires should be inflated to the prescribed

pressure.

• Close all doors.

• Rock the vehicle to stabilize the suspen-

sion.

Headlight aiming is done with the vehicle

low beam lamps. The high beam lamps will

be correctly aimed if the low beam lamps

are aimed properly.

If you find that the headlight needs adjust-

ment follow these steps:

1 Open the hood and locate the vertical

aiming device.

2 Locate the marker on the lens.

3 Measure the distance from the ground to

the aim marker on each lens.

Subtract 2 inches if the vehicle is

equipped with halogen lamps, record

this distance.

Subtract 3 inches if the vehicle is

equipped with xenon lamps, record this

distance.

4 At the wall or other flat surface, measure

from the ground to the recorded dis-

tance (see point 4) and draw a horizontal

line the width of the vehicle.

IB1950

4 3

1 Wall or garage door

2 25 ft (7.6 m) between wall and headlight lens.

3 Measurement from the ground to the low beam aiming marker on the headlight lens.

4 Same measurement as (3) but substract 2 inches for vehicles with halogen lamps and

3 inches for vehicles with xenon lamps.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 248 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

249Car care and technical information

5 Turn on the low beam headlights and

place a piece of cardboard or equivalent

(although not directly on the lens) in front

of the headlight not being aimed. This

should allow the beam cut-off of the

headlight being aimed to be seen on the

flat surface.

6 Turn the vertical aiming screw until the

horizontal cut-off of the headlight is

aligned with the horizontal line on the

wall.

NOTICE

Do not cover a headlight directly on the

lens to improve beam cut-off when aim-

ing. Covering a headlight may cause

excessive heat build-up which may cause

damage to the headlight.

IB1951

Vertical aiming device

IB1952

Aiming marker on headlight lens

IB1953

Horizontal line on wall or other flat surface

IB1954

Correctly adjusted low beam

95_U S_M 07.book Page 249 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

250 Car care and technical information

(This page has been left blank.)

95_U S_M 07.book Page 250 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

251Customer Assistance and Information

Maintenance schedule _ 252

Owner assistance _____ 253

Reporting Safety Defects

(U.S.A.) _____________ 254

Reporting Safety Defects

to the Canadian

government _________ 254

Vehicle Data Collection

and Event Data

Recorders __________ 255

Customer Assistance and Information

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,

market specification, options or accessories).

95_U S_M 07.book Page 251 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

252 Customer Assistance and Information

Maintenance schedule

The Maintenance Schedule prescribes a

service program to the purchaser/operator

of a Saab that is reasonable and necessary

to ensure the proper emission control sys-

tems function, safety and reliability of the

Saab automobile in normal use. Additional

maintenance is recommended for specific

components when the car is operated under

certain severe conditions. Proper mainte-

nance is always good advice!

Authorized Saab dealers are equipped and

trained to meet your Saab’s service needs.

They regularly receive up-to-date Saab

service manuals and parts and technical

service bulletins from Saab and are able,

through their franchise agreement, to attend

Saab service schools, obtain Saab special

tools and technical assistance and pur-

chase original equipment service and

replacement parts.

Today’s complex automobiles should only

be entrusted to the most knowledgeable

service professionals. A Saab dealer is your

best choice.

Service intervals

A time for service message will illuminate on

the Saab Instrument Display (SID) when the

car is due for regular maintenance.

Engine oil and filter changes

Changing the engine oil and filter is required

at every service point. Use only a Saab

approved long-life oil filter and engine oils

stated in the Specification section of this

Owner’s Manual. The use of extra additives

in the oil is not necessary and is not recom-

mended, and may be harmful to turbo-

chargers.

More frequent oil changes are recom-

mended if your vehicle is operated under

the following conditions:

• Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to

16 km). This is particularly important

when outside temperatures are below

freezing.

• Most trips include extensive idling (such

as frequent stop-and-go driving).

• Most trips are through dusty areas.

• You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier

on top of your vehicle.

• If the vehicle is used for delivery service,

police, taxi or other commercial applica-

tions.

If your driving habits match this description,

have the engine oil and filter changed in-

between normal services at 5,000 mile

(8,000 km) intervals. The Saab Warranty

and Service Record Booklet has provisions

to record extra oil changes.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 252 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

253Customer Assistance and Information

Service record retention

It is the owner´s responsibility to retain ser-

vice records. If possible, you should keep

copies of all shop work orders for all service

and repairs, whenever performed. As indi-

cated in the new car and emission control

system warranties, it is important to docu-

ment that all necessary maintenance has

been done.

HOW THE SERVICE RECORD IS

ORGANIZED

The service record is comprised of a series

of coupons on which to record services as

they are performed. There are additional

coupons for documenting extra engine oil

and filter changes, extra automatic trans-

mission fluid services necessary for severe

service conditions, and brake fluid changes.

HOW TO USE THE SERVICE

RECORD COUPONS

When the car is brought to a Saab dealer for

scheduled maintenance, present the Saab

Warranty and Service Record Booklet to the

service manager. When the technician has

completed the service, the technician will

sign the maintenance record. The person

responsible for quality assurance at the

dealership will also sign and stamp the

record with the dealer identification stamp.

Service costs

Dealer pricing practices and labor for ser-

vice work vary. Saab’s recommended ser-

vice times for each service point do not

include the labor required to replace wear

items, such as wiper blades, brake pads or

tires. Nor is labor to perform other service or

repairs found to be necessary as a result of

the inspections included in these times.

Additional labor and parts will be charged

for such work when necessary, except as

covered under an applicable Saab warranty

or any optional extended service contract.

Transmission fluid changes or suspension

alignment, when necessary, are also addi-

tional.

Dealer charges for general shop material,

regulated hazardous waste removal, recy-

cling expenses or other operation costs may

also be applied to service and repair

invoices and are apt to vary by dealer and

location.

Owner assistance

Warranties and service problem

assistance

For complete information about all applica-

ble warranties, including the New Car War-

ranty, Perforation Warranty, Vehicle Emis-

sion Warranty and Emission Perforation

Warranty, consult the Warranties and Ser-

vice Record Booklet which accompanies

this Owner’s Manual. It also contains owner

assistance information including Saab

Roadside Assistance. If the booklet is lost or

misplaced, a new one may be ordered

through a Saab dealer or by contacting

Saab.

In the U.S. there is a national Customer

Assistance Center at Saab Automobile

USA, Inc. The toll-free number to call from

all 50 states is 1-800-955-9007.

In Canada, please call the Saab Customer

Assistance Center at 1-800-263-1999.

A list of authorized Saab sales and service

dealers is available for those planning to

travel in the United States and Canada.

Canadian or U.S. travelers may call the

Customer Assistance Center in the country

in which they are traveling.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 253 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

254 Customer Assistance and Information

Change of Address Notification

(U.S. and Canada)

Two change of address cards are provided

at the end of the Warranty and Service

Record Booklet. Knowing your current

address allows Saab to contact you in the

event of a recall or service campaign.

Please help us keep our records up to date

for your own peace of mind.

Service information

Factory Service Manuals for the Saab 9-5

car line can be ordered through your Saab

dealer or by visiting www.saabtechinfo.com.

These are comprehensive manuals on CD

rom, geared to use by professional techni-

cians.

Consult your Saab dealer for prices and for

a listing for your model.

Reporting Safety

Defects (U.S.A.)

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect

which could cause a crash or could cause

injury or death, you should immediately

inform the National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-

fying Saab Cars USA, Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it

may open an investigation, and if it finds that

a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles,

it may order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become involved

in individual problems between you, your

dealer, or Saab Automobile USA, Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

toll-free Vehicle Safety Hotline at

1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153; go

http://www.safercar.gov

; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,

SW., Washington D.C. 20590. You can also

obtain other information about motor vehi-

cle safety from

http:// www safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety

Defects to the Canadian

government

If you live in Canada, and believe that your

vehicle has a safety defect, you should

immediately notify Transport Canada, in

addition to notifying General Motors of

Canada Limited.

You may write to Transport Canada at

Box 8880, Ottawa, Ontario, K1G 3J2.

In addition to notifying Transport Canada

in a situation like this, we certainly hope

you will notify us. In Canada, please call

our Saab Customer Assistance Center at

1-800-263- 1999.

Or write:

General Motors of Canada Limited

Customer Assistance Center,

1908 Colonel Sam Drive,

Oshawa, Ontario, L1H 8P7.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 254 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

255Customer Assistance and Information

Vehicle Data Collection and

Event Data Recorders

Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehi-

cles, has a number of sophisticated com-

puter systems that monitor and control sev-

eral aspects of the vehicle’s performance.

Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle comput-

ers to monitor emission control components

to optimize fuel economy, to monitor condi-

tions for air bag deployment and, if so

equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and

to help the driver control the vehicle in diffi-

cult driving situations. Some information

may be stored during regular operations to

facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;

other information is stored only in a crash

event by computer systems commonly

called event data recorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such

as the Air Bag Sensing and Diagnostic

Module (SDM) in your vehicle may record

information about the condition of the vehi-

cle and how it was operated, such as data

related to engine speed, brake application,

throttle position, vehicle speed, steering

wheel angle, lateral acceleration, safety belt

usage, air bag readiness, air bag perfor-

mance, and the severity of a collision. This

information has been used to improve vehi-

cle crash performance and may be used to

improve crash performance of future vehi-

cles and driving safety. Unlike the data

recorders on many airplanes, these

on-board systems do not record sounds,

such as conversation of vehicle occupants.

To read this information, special equipment

is needed and access to the vehicle or the

SDM is required.

Saab will not access information about a

crash event or share it with others other than

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if

the vehicle is leased, with the consent of

the lessee,

• in response to an official request of police

or similar government office,

• as part of Saab’s defense of litigation

through the discovery process, or

• as required by law.

In addition, once Saab collects or receives

data, Saab may

• use the data for Saab research needs,

• make it available for research where

appropriate confidentiality is to be main-

tained and need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to a

specific vehicle with non-Saab organiza-

tions for research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may have

access to the special equipment that can

read the information if they have access to

the vehicle or SDM.

If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®,

please check the OnStar® subscription ser-

vice agreement or manual for information

on its operations and data collection.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 255 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

256 Customer Assistance and Information

(This page has been left blank)

95_U S_M 07.book Page 256 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

257Specifications

General______________ 258

Engine ______________ 260

Fuel_________________ 260

Engine oil____________ 261

Engine variants _______ 262

Electrical system______ 263

Drive belts ___________ 263

Manual gearbox_______ 264

Automatic transmission 264

Suspension __________ 265

Steering _____________ 265

Brake system_________ 265

Wheels and tires ______ 266

Plates and labels______ 268

IB3918

Specifications

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,

market specification, options or accessories).

95_U S_M 07.book Page 257 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

258 Specifications

General

Overall length, including bumpers:

9-5 Sedan_______________________ 190.4 in (4836 mm)

9-5 SportCombi __________________ 190.6 in (4841 mm)

Overall width, including door mirrors ____ 80.4 in (2042 mm)

Maximum height:

9-5 Sedan_______________________ 57.3 in (1454 mm)

9-5 SportCombi __________________ 57.7 in (1465 mm)

Wheelbase _______________________ 106.4 in (2703 mm)

Ground clearance at gross vehicle weight approx. 4.6 in

(116 mm)

Tr a ck :

Front __________________________ 59.9 in (1522 mm) *)

Rear ___________________________ 60.2 in (1528 mm) *)

Turning circle (curb to curb) ___________ 37.1 ft (11.3 m)

Turning circle (measured at vehicle extremi-

ties) _____________________________ 39.0 ft (11.9 m)

Number of seats (incl. driver) _________ 5

Specified track applies to wheel sizes:

6 x 15 & 6.5 x 16

VIN on cars sold in

USA

VIN on cars sold in Canada

Permissible load (in addition to driver) = GVW minus curb weight

The maximum permissible axle load, front or rear, must not be exceeded.

Chassis number in engine bay

Weight ready for driving (i.e. with full fuel

tank, washer-fluid reservoir, standard tools

and spare wheel) ____________________

3430–3750 lbs.

(1555–1700 kg)

Gross vehicle weight (GVW) ___________ 4380–4680 lbs.

(1980–2125 kg)

Maximum axle load:

Front ___________________________ 2590 lbs. (1175 kg)

Rear, 9-5 Sedan ___________________ 2310 lbs. (1050 kg)

Rear, 9-5 SportCombi ______________ 2480 lbs. (1125 kg)

Weight distribution:

Curb weight, front/rear ______________ 60/40 %

GVW, front/rear ___________________ 50/50 %

Maximum roof load __________________ 220 lbs. (100 kg)

Maximum luggage compartment load§ ___ 176 lbs. (80 kg)

Maximum combined load, luggage

compartment and roof ________________ 264 lbs. (120 kg)

95_U S_M 07.book Page 258 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

259Specifications

Trailer:

Luggage compartment

Volume (SAE):

9-5 Sedan_______________________ 15.9 cu.ft.

(450 litres)

9-5 SportCombi, rear seat upright ____ 31.4 cu. ft.

(890 litres)

9-5 SportCombi, rear seat folded _____ 73.0 cu. ft.

(2067 litres)

Luggage compartment, length, 9-5 Sedan:

Rear seat upright _________________ 43.0 in (1092 mm)

Rear seat folded down _____________ 67.5 in (1714 mm)

Luggage compartment, length,

9-5 SportCombi:

Rear seat upright _________________ 42.8 in (1087 mm)

Rear seat folded __________________ 68.2 in (1732 mm)

WARNING

• The GVW and maximum axle loads must not be exceeded.

Note that if some accessories (e.g. towbar, CD changer) are

fitted, the available load capacity is reduced by the weight of

these.

• When carrying a load in the luggage compartment, make sure

that it is tied down securely, particularly when part or all of the

rear seat is folded down.

Maximum towing speed:

Trailer with brakes _________________ 60 mph (100 km/h)

Trailer without brakes _______________ Local restrictions

apply

Maximum weight:

Trailer with brakes _________________ 3500 lbs (1588 kg)

Trailer without brakes ______________ 1000 lbs (450 kg)

Maximum load on ball hitch __________ 110–165 lbs

(50–75 kg)

The above speed and weight restrictions are those specified by

Saab Automobile AB.

Note that local restrictions may apply to trailer speeds and weights

(see page 174).

95_U S_M 07.book Page 259 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

260 Specifications

Engine

Fuel

4-cylinder ________________________ Four cylinders, twin

overhead cam-

shafts, 16 valves

and two balancer

shafts.

Cylinder bores _____________________ 3.54 in (90 mm)

Stroke ___________________________ 3.54 in (90 mm)

Swept volume _____________________ 139.7 cu.in

(2.290 litres)

Idling speed _______________________ 825 rpm (man.)

860 rpm (aut.)

Antifreeze_________________________ Saab-approved

antifreeze

Coolant capacity ___________________ 7.8 qts (7.4 litres)

Fuel-tank capacity ____________ 18.0 gal. (68 litres)

For optimum performance Saab

recommends:_________________ •AON93*

* If AON 90 is used some decrease in engine power can occur.

Gasoline with a lower octane rating can be used, although not

lower than AON 87. However, engine performance will fall slightly

and heavy loading and laboring should be avoided. For optimum

performance, use the recommended grade of fuel.

For further information on fuel, see page 148.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 260 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

261Specifications

Engine oil

To meet demands in Saab's extended service intervals all

engines are filled with specially designed synthetic factory fill

oils. Long service intervals, fuel economy and environmental

issues are the base for our choice of oil. By using oils approved

by Saab you minimise the tendencies for oil sludge build, by that

protecting the engine from harmful, wear increasing, deposits.

Approved engine oils:

All gasoline engines - Fully synthetic engine oil - approved

against the GM-LL-A025 specification - with viscosity

SAE 0W-30 or SAE 0W-40.

Oil used at, or in-between, service must be approved against the

engine´s specified classification to render possible the usage of

Saab Automobile AB specified service intervals.

For optimum performance Saab recommends the use of Saab

Long Life Turbo Oil 0W-30 or Mobil 1 0W-40 European Car for-

mula, but other oils approved against the above specification

and with proper SAE viscosity 0W-30 or 0W-40 may also be

used.

Servicing/Oil changes:

To be able to use recommended service intervals the need to

use only approved engine oils is vital. Use only engine oils

approved for your engine. Service should be done according

to the recommended service intervals to optimize your engine's

function through out its entire life. Saab Automobile AB will not

take responsibility for any damage that might occur due to

neglecting to meet above mentioned requirements.

At your Saab dealers you can find Saab Genuine or Mobil

engine oils. Among those there are oils specially designed to

meet your engines specific needs. We recommend that you,

with the help of our skilled service personnel, choose your oil

from that assortment.

Other oil companies also offer engine oils approved against GM

specifications. Oils meeting these standards may be marketed

as synthetic. However, not all synthetic engine oils will meet your

engine´s specific requirements. Please ensure only to use oils

approved against your engine´s specific requirements, i.e.

GM-LL-A025 with viscosity SAE 0W-30 or 0W-40.

Recommended oil viscosity

Viscosity is a measurement of the oil´s thickness at various tem-

peratures, according to the SAE standard. This thickness influ-

ences e.g. fuel economy and cold starting properties. For

optimum performance Saab recommends:

For gasoline engines:

SAE 0W-30

SAE 0W-40 engine oil

Extra engine oil additives

Don't add anything to your oil. The recommended oils are all you

will need for good engine performance and protection.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 261 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

262 Specifications

Engine variants

When to change engine oil

Your vehicle will display when it is time for servicing on the SID,

based on the mileage and time since the last service.

For this service system to work it is of outmost importance that

the right engine oil is used.

When the message for service is displayed you need to have the

required service done as soon as possible.

After the service your service personnel will reset the service

indicator. It is important to reset the service indicator in order to

optimize the time to the next service.

Oil capacity incl. filter (on changing) ____ 4.1 qts (4.0 litres)

2.3T Ecopower

Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ____________ 220 hp (162 kW)

Maximum torque, EEC at 1800-4500 rpm 228.6 ft.lb

(310 Nm)

Compression ratio _________________ 9.3:1

2.3 Turbo Ecopower

Rating, EEC at 5000 rpm ____________ 260 hp (191 kW)

Maximum torque, EEC at 1900 rpm ____ 258.0 ft.lb.

(350 Nm)

Compression ratio _________________ 9.3:1

95_U S_M 07.book Page 262 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

263Specifications

Electrical system Drive belts

Voltage __________________________ 12 V

Battery capacity ___________________ 70 Ah

Starter motor ______________________ 1.4 kW

Alternator rating ____________________ 140 A/14 V

Firing order _______________________ 1–3–4–2

Spark plugs:

2.3 Turbo _______________________ NGK

PFR 6H-10

2.3T and 2.3 Turbo ________________ NGK

PFR 6H-10

Electrode gap ____________________ 0.0374 in (0.95 mm)

Engine variants Outside length

Drive belt _________________________ 95.08 in

(2415 mm)

Drive belt

IB929

95_U S_M 07.book Page 263 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

264 Specifications

Manual gearbox Automatic transmission

Type ____________________________ All-synchromesh

5-speed with final

drive and differen-

tial

Oil ______________________________ Saab MTF 0063

Oil capacity _______________________ 1.9 qts (1.8 litres)

Oil volume (on changing) ____________ 1.6 qts (1.5 litres)

Clutch type _______________________ Hydraulic, single

dry-plate clutch of

diaphragm-spring

type

Speed (mph / km/h) at 1000 rpm in 5th gear: 27–29 / 43–47

Type _____________________________ Electronically con-

trolled 5-speed,

fully automatic with

hydraulic torque

converter, plane-

tary gear set and

integral final drive

Lock-up function in

selector positions 3,

4 and 5.

Selector-lever positions ______________ P R N D M L

Clutch type ________________________ Hydraulic plate

clutches, brake

bands and one-way

couplings

Speed (mph / km/h) at 1000 rpm in 5th gear: 29–30 / 46–48

95_U S_M 07.book Page 264 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

265Specifications

Suspension

Steering

Brake system

Spring type, front and rear ___________ Coil springs

Maximum deflection of springs:

Front __________________________ 7.09 in (180 mm)

Rear ___________________________ 7.87 in (200 mm)

Dampers:

Front __________________________ Gas-filled

Rear ___________________________ Oil and gas filled

Steering _________________________ Power-assisted

steering of

rack-and-pinion

type; telescopic

steering-column

shaft with universal

joints

Number of turns, lock to lock __________ 2.9

Power-steering fluid ________________ Power-steering fluid

CHF 11S or

CHF 202

Footbrake (ABS) ____________________ Hydraulic, dual-

circuit brake sys-

tem. Diagonally

split circuit with vac-

uum servo unit.

Disc brakes front

and rear. EBD, see

page 160.

Parkingbrake _______________________ Acts on rear wheels

Brake fluid _________________________ DOT 4

Brake-fluid capacity _________________ 0.951 qts (900 ml)

Disc diameter:

Front, ventilated ___________________ 12.05 in (308 mm)

Rear, solid _______________________ 11.26 in (286 mm)

Total friction area of brake pads:

Front ___________________________ 36.3 in2 (234 cm2)

Rear ___________________________ 15.5 in2 (100 cm2)

95_U S_M 07.book Page 265 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

266 Specifications

Wheels and tires

(recommended dimensions)

2.3 Turbo

All season tires

215/55 R16 93 H X

235/45 R17 94 V X

Winter tires

215/55 R16 93 Q X

225/45 R17 94 Q XL/RF X

235/45 R17 94 Q X

Wheel sizes

6.5 x 16” X

7 x 17” X

7.5 x 17” X

Speed ratings and load indexes, see page 230.

Before changing to wheels/tyres of another size, we recommend that you

contact an authorized Saab workshop regarding acceptable options.

Compact spare:

Wheel __________________________ 4 x 16”

Tire ____________________________ T115/70 R16

Pressure________________________ 60 psi (420 kPa)

Maximum life ____________________ 2,200 miles

(3500 km)

Maximum speed _________________ 50 mph (80 km/h)

Full size spare wheel:

Wheel___________________________ 6.5 x 16”

Tire_____________________________ 215/55 R16

Pressure_________________________ 42 psi (290 kPa)

Maximum life _____________________ 2,200 miles

(3500 km)

Maximum speed __________________ 50 mph (80 km/h)

NOTICE

Snow chains:

Snow chains must not be fitted to the rear wheels, and may only

be used with the following wheel-tire combinations:

Wheels Tires

6.5 x 16”_______ 215/55 R16

Snow chains must not be fitted to 17" wheels.

Max. permissible speed with snow chains fitted is 30 mph

(50 km/h).

Contact an authorized Saab dealer for advice on snow chains.

NOTICE

Wheels larger than 17” must not be fitted.

Wheel offset must be 49 mm.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 266 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

267Specifications

Lowest recommended tire pressure, cold tires

Tire size Load/speed

mph (km/h) 1)

Front

kPa/psi

Rear

kPa/psi

All season tires

215/55 R16 93 H 1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 250/36 230/33

4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 250/36 230/33

1–5 pers./100– (160–) 290/42 270/39

235/45 R17 94 V 1–3 pers./0–120 (0–190) 240/35 240/35

4–5 pers./0–120 (0–190) 240/35 240/35

1–5 pers./120– (190–) 280/41 280/41

Tire size Load/speed

mph (km/h) 1)

Front

kPa/psi

Rear

kPa/psi

Winter tires

215/55 R16 93 Q 1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 240/35 240/35

4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 260/38 260/38

225/45 R17 94 Q

XL/RF

1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 250/36 250/36

4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 270/39 270/39

235/45 R17 94 Q 1–3 pers./0–100 (0–160) 240/35 240/35

4–5 pers./0–100 (0–160) 260/38 260/38

Compact spare

T115/70 R16

Spare wheel

Max 50 (80) 420/60 420/60

215/55 R16 93 H

Spare wheel

Max 50 (80) 290/42 290/42

1) Do not exceed posted speed limits.

By cold tires is meant tires that are the same temperature as the surround-

ing air temperature.

The values for tire pressure in the table above are for tires at 68°F (20°C).

The tire pressure will increase as the tires become warm (e.g. during

motorway driving), and decrease as they cool.

When the temperature of the tires increase or decrease by 10 degrees the

tire pressure will correspondingly increase or decrease by 10 kPa/2 psi

(0.1 bar).

95_U S_M 07.book Page 267 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

268 Specifications

Plates and labels

When consulting your Saab dealer, it may be

necessary to quote the car’s V.I.N., engine

and gearbox numbers.

1 V.I.N. number, inside windshield.

2 V.I.N. label and certification label.

3 Gearbox number.

4 Engine number.

5Canada: Label for tire pressure and color

codes (trim and body).

USA: color codes (trim and body) can be

found on the V.I.N. label on the B-pillar.

6 Chassis number, stamped on body.

IB4528

95_U S_M 07.book Page 268 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

269Specifications

1 Region ___________ Y = Northern Europe

2 Country __________ S = Sweden

3 Manufacturer _____ 3 = Saab Automobile AB

4 Product line ______ E = 9-5

5 Model series ______ D = 9-5 Arc with driver’s and

passenger-side airbags

H = 9-5 Aero with driver’s and

passenger-side airbags

6 Body version _____ 4 =

5 =

4-door

5-door

7 Gearbox __________ 5 =

9 =

Manual 5-speed

Automatic 5-speed

8Engine variant _____ G = 2.3Turbo

8Engine variant _____ A =

G =

2.3T

2.3 Turbo

9 Check digit ________ 0–9/X

10 Model year ________ 7 = 2007

11 Factory ___________ 3 = Trollhättan

12 Serial number ______ 000001–999999

position:1234567891011 12

||||||||||| |

V. I . N . : Y S 3 E H 4 9 G 6 7 3 045842

||||||

123456= identification codes for certain chassis details

95_U S_M 07.book Page 269 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

270 Specifications

Several of the systems in your

Saab car can be adjusted to

better fit your individual needs

Some functions are governed by legal

requirements and cannot therefore be

reprogrammed.

We recommend that you contact an autho-

rized Saab dealer for further information.

Car alarm/central locking system:

• The number of blinks when locking/

unlocking.

• Automatic locking of the trunk when the

car (SportCombi) is driven, 1 to 8 mph

(2–14 km/h), YES or NO.

• Preclude the unlocking of the trunk while

the car (SportCombi) is driven, YES or

NO.

• Automatic locking of the trunk (Sport-

Combi) after 1 second–4 minutes if it has

not been opened, YES or NO.

• Automatic locking of the trunk (Sport-

Combi) when it is closed, YES or NO.

• Automatic locking of all doors when the

car is driven above 7.5 mph (12 km/h),

YES or NO.

Saab Information Display:

• Outdoor temperature display can be

adjusted.

Miscellaneous:

• Select the on-time for heated rear seat 3.

• Additional sweep of the wipers after wind-

shield washer function (ON or OFF).

• Courtesy Headlight Feature on-time can

vary from 20 to 50 seconds.

• Night panel illumination deactivation

speed for the speedometer can be

adjusted.

Following adjustments can be

done by the driver:

Automatic Climate Control (ACC):

You can choose whether front seat and rear

window heating is to be activated manually

or automatically; see "Adaptation of ACC"

on page 85.

Saab 9-5 Audio System (see page 106):

• Speed dependent volume.

Daytime Running Lights:

To disable, turn off the ignition and pull out

fuse 35, see page 219.

95_U S_M 07.book Page 270 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

271Index

Index

A/C system, fault diagnosis _______ 244

A/C system, maintenance _________ 243

ABS brakes ____________________ 160

ACC __________________________ 79

ACC functions ___________________ 82

ACC, automatic climate control _____ 79

ACC, calibration _________________ 86

ACC, condensation water __________ 86

ACC, useful tips _________________ 86

AUX input _____________________ 104

Adjusting the steering wheel _______ 114

Adjustment, seats ________________ 18

Air conditioning (A/C), fault diagnosis

and maintenance ______________ 243

Airbag _________________________ 29

Alarm _________________________ 50

Alarm functions __________________ 53

Alarm signals ________________ 50, 53

Album information _______________ 104

Alternator _____________________ 201

Alternator drive belt __________ 201, 263

Alternator rating ________________ 263

Antennas ______________________ 109

Anticorrosion treatment ___________ 245

Antidazzle rear-view mirror ________ 121

Anti-skid ______________________ 163

Autochecking of lights on starting ____ 64

Auto-dimming rear-view mirror with

garage door opener ____________ 118

Automatic climate control (ACC) _____ 79

Automatic transmission, technical

data _________________________ 264

Aviod theft, tip __________________ 166

Battery ________________________ 199

Battery charging/replacing ________ 200

Battery, boost starting ____________ 186

Before a long journey ____________ 246

Before towing a camper or trailer ___ 177

Belt guide ______________________ 12

Boost starting using jump leads ____ 186

Brake and clutch fluid ____________ 196

Brake-fluid reservoir _____________ 196

Brakes, technical data ____________ 265

Bulbs, changing ________________ 204

Bulbs, table of __________________ 215

Buying new tires ________________ 225

CD changer ____________________ 100

CHECK messages _______________ 71

CHECKING _____________________ 71

Car alarm ______________________ 50

Car care ______________________ 189

Cargo net, 9-5 SportCombi ________ 137

Carpeting, care of _______________ 240

Catalytic converter, important

considerations _________________ 145

Central locking ___________________ 44

Change language in SID ___________ 72

Change of address notification _____ 254

Changing a wheel _______________ 236

Changing bulbs _________________ 204

Changing wiper blades ___________ 202

Charge mobile phone ____________ 126

Charger/Jump starting ____________ 188

Charging the battery/Jump starting __ 188

Chassis number ________________ 268

Chassis number, key to ___________ 269

Checks before towing a camper or

trailer ________________________ 177

Child safety _____________________ 22

Child safety locks, rear doors _______ 47

Cleaning, engine bay _____________ 242

Clock _________________________ 105

Color code, body ________________ 268

Color code, trim _________________ 268

Compact spare wheel ____________ 234

Compass ______________________ 122

Condensation water, ACC __________ 86

Connecting a portable player ______ 104

Coolant _______________________ 195

Courtesy Headlight Feature ________ 74

Crash memory, see EDR _________ 255

Cross modulation _______________ 110

Cruise control __________________ 159

Cup holder _____________________ 128

95_U S_M 07.book Page 271 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

272 Index

DICE/TWICE ___________________ 217

Dampers ______________________ 265

Date _________________________ 105

Date code, tires _________________ 234

Date display ___________________ 105

Definitions and terminology, tire ____ 231

Determining correct load, tires _____ 233

Dim-dipped beam ________________ 73

Direction indicators _______________ 75

Diversity antenna _______________ 109

Door handles ___________________ 44

Door mirrors ___________________ 116

Doors, locks & luggage compartment _43

Drive belt ______________________ 263

Drive belt, alternator _____________ 201

Drive belts, length _______________ 263

Driver’s seat, programmable ________ 20

Driving at night _________________ 181

Driving in hot weather ____________ 173

Driving with a load ______________ 181

EDR (Event Data Recorders) ______ 255

ESP® _________________________ 163

Electric heating of rear seat ________ 87

Electric windows ________________ 115

Electrical system, technical data ____ 263

Electronic Stability Program _______ 163

Electronic starting interlock _________ 49

Emergency operation of moonroof __ 124

Emission control systems _________ 192

Engine bay ____________________ 191

Engine bay, cleaning _____________ 242

Engine number _________________ 268

Engine oil, grade ________________ 261

Engine, description ______________ 194

Engine, technical data ____________ 260

Engine, temperature gauge ________ 65

Engine-oil level, checking _________ 194

Error codes, Audio System ________ 112

Event Data Recorders (EDR) ______ 255

Expansion tank, coolant __________ 195

Filling a portable fuel container _____ 148

Flat spots, tires _________________ 224

Fluid level, automatic transmission __ 195

Folding the parcel shelf,

9-5 SportCombi ________________ 133

Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Sedan ___ 129

Folding the rear seat, 9-5 SportCombi 132

Frequency band _________________ 93

Frequently asked questions on airbag 40

Front fog lights __________________ 76

Frost warning ___________________ 68

Fuel __________________________ 146

Fuel consumption ________________ 68

Fuel container __________________ 148

Fuel gauge _____________________ 65

Fuel grade _____________________ 260

Fuel information _________________ 148

Fuse box under hood ____________ 220

Fuse panel _____________________ 216

Fuses _________________________ 216

Garage door opener _____________ 118

Gearbox number ________________ 268

Gearbox oil, checking ____________ 195

Gearbox, technical data, __________ 264

General functions _______________ 105

Glove compartment ______________ 126

Handbrake _____________________ 165

Hazard warning lights _____________ 76

Head restraint ___________________ 21

Headlight flasher _________________ 73

Headlights ______________________ 73

Heated front seats ________________ 87

Hood _________________________ 190

Horn __________________________ 114

If a tire goes flat _________________ 228

Ignition switch __________________ 140

Immobilizer _____________________ 49

Indicator and warning lights _________ 58

95_U S_M 07.book Page 272 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

273Index

Indicator lights ___________________ 58

Information about fuel ____________ 148

Instrument illumination ____________ 75

Instruments and controls __________ 57

Interior equipment _______________ 113

Interior lighting _________________ 124

Interior rearview mirror ___________ 116

Jack _________________________ 237

Key ___________________________ 44

Key to chassis number ___________ 269

Key, remove ___________________ 140

LATCH (child safety) ______________ 23

Labeling, tire sidewall ____________ 229

Labels __________________________ 7

Leather upholstery, care of ________ 240

Light horn ______________________ 73

Light switches ___________________ 73

Loading MP3 discs ______________ 102

Loading your vehicle _____________ 231

Luggage-compartment lighting _____ 125

MP3 player ____________________ 102

Main instrument panel _____________ 58

Main/dipped beam _______________ 73

Maintenance schedule ___________ 252

Maintenance, A/C-system _________ 243

Manual gearbox, technical data ____ 264

Maxi fuses _____________________ 217

Milometer ______________________ 64

Moonroof ______________________ 123

Motoring abroad ________________ 246

Multipath propagation ____________ 109

NIGHT _________________________ 72

New tires, buying _______________ 225

Night Panel _____________________ 72

Odometer ______________________ 64

Oil capacity, engine ______________ 260

Oil specification _________________ 260

Outdoor temperature ______________ 68

Owner assistance _______________ 253

Paintwork, touching-in ____________ 242

Parcel shelf, folding ______________ 133

Parking Assistance ______________ 168

Parking lights ____________________ 73

Plates and labels ________________ 268

Poly-V-belt _____________________ 201

Portable fuel container ___________ 148

Portable player _________________ 104

Power outlet ___________________ 126

Power steering _________________ 198

Power-steering fluid ______________ 198

Pressure gauge __________________ 66

Prestige _______________________ 107

Programme type ALARM __________ 99

Quality grading, tires _____________ 226

Questions on function of airbag ______ 40

RDS time ______________________ 106

Radiator fan ____________________ 201

Radio __________________________ 93

Radio Data System (RDS) _________ 94

Radio text ______________________ 94

Radio waves ___________________ 110

Rain sensor _____________________ 77

95_U S_M 07.book Page 273 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

274 Index

Random playback of MP3 files, CD _ 103

Random playback, CD ____________ 99

Random playback, CD changer ____ 101

Rapid playing an MP3 file _________ 103

Rear fog light ___________________ 74

Rear seat, 9-5 Sedan, folding ______ 129

Rear seat, 9-5 SportCombi, folding _ 132

Rear window heating _____________ 82

Rear-seat head restraints __________ 21

Rear-view mirror, auto-dimming ____ 121

Rearview mirrors ________________ 116

Reclamation ___________________ 247

Recommendations for cars with

automatic transmission, towing a

camper or trailer _______________ 175

Refuelling _____________________ 146

Relay panel ____________________ 219

Remote control __________________ 44

Remote-control battery, changing ____ 49

Remove the key ________________ 140

Removing CDs __________________ 99

Removing CDs, CD-changer ______ 100

Removing MP3 discs ____________ 102

Replacement, wheel _____________ 227

Reporting safety defects __________ 254

Reprogramming of systems _______ 270

Reservoir, power-steering fluid _____ 198

Rev counter ____________________ 64

Reversing lights _________________ 76

Rolling advertisements ____________ 94

Roof load _____________________ 179

Running-in ____________________ 170

SDM _________________________ 255

SID ___________________________ 68

Saab Information Display (SID) _____ 68

Saab Parking Assistance _________ 168

Safety belts _____________________ 12

Safety belts, care of _____________ 239

Safety-belt pretensioners __________ 15

Safety-belt reminder ______________ 12

Seats __________________________ 18

Securing a load __________________ 47

Selecting a radio station ___________ 93

Selecting and changing tracks, CD ___ 99

Selecting/changing MP3 file _______ 103

Selector lever indication, automatic

transmission ___________________ 67

Sentronic, manual mode __________ 156

Service costs ___________________ 253

Service information ______________ 254

Service intervals ________________ 252

Service record retention __________ 253

Setting the clock ________________ 105

Setting the date _________________ 105

Settings, seats __________________ 18

Shadow effect __________________ 110

Side airbags ____________________ 36

Signalling, horn _________________ 114

Snow chains ___________________ 172

Sorting music __________________ 103

Sound system __________________ 107

Sources of AM interference _______ 111

Sources of FM interference ________ 111

Spare wheel ___________________ 234

Spare wheel and tools ____________ 183

Spark plugs ____________________ 263

Speed dependent volume

compensation _________________ 106

Speedometer _________________64, 65

Starting in cold weather, ACC _______ 84

Starting in hot weather, ACC ________ 84

Steering wheel adjustment ________ 114

Steering wheel controls ____________ 91

Steering, technical data ___________ 265

Steps for determining correct load

limit _________________________ 233

Stone-chip damage, repairing ______ 242

Storage compartments ___________ 126

Storing radio stations ______________ 93

Sun visors _____________________ 125

Suspension ____________________ 265

Suspension, technical data ________ 265

Switches _______________________ 73

Symboler ________________________ 9

Systems, adjustment _____________ 270

TCS OFF _______________________ 63

TP ____________________________ 99

Table of fuses __________________ 218

Tachometer _____________________ 64

Tailgate, opening _________________ 47

Tank gauge _____________________ 65

95_U S_M 07.book Page 274 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

275Index

Technical data _________________ 257

Technical data, radio/audio ________ 108

Temperature control, ACC _________ 81

Temperature gauge, engine ________ 65

Temperature zones, ACC __________ 81

Textile carpeting ________________ 240

Through-load hatch ______________ 131

Tie Downs _____________________ 131

Tightening torque, wheel studs _____ 236

Time display ___________________ 105

Tip, driving at night ______________ 181

Tip, to avoid theft _______________ 166

Tips, ACC ______________________ 86

Tire chains ____________________ 228

Tire date code __________________ 234

Tire inspection and rotation _______ 223

Tire markings __________________ 230

Tire pressure ___________________ 182

Tire sidewall labeling ____________ 229

Tire terminology and definitions ____ 231

Tire, compact spare _____________ 234

Tires _____________________ 222, 266

Tires, winter ___________________ 266

Tools _________________________ 183

Touching-in the paintwork _________ 242

Towbar attachment ______________ 174

Towbar load ___________________ 178

Towing the car _________________ 183

Towing, automatics ______________ 183

Traffic programme _______________ 99

Trailer weights _________________ 259

Treadwear indicators ____________ 224

Trionic ________________________ 192

Trip computer ___________________ 68

Trip meter ______________________ 64

Trunk _________________________ 129

Trunk lid, opening ________________ 47

Tuning _________________________ 93

Turbo gauge ____________________ 66

Turbo, points to note _____________ 144

Under the hood _________________ 191

Uniform tire quality grading ________ 226

Upholstery and trim ______________ 240

Upholstery and trim, care of _______ 240

Vanity mirrors __________________ 125

Vehicle Data Collection ___________ 255

Ventilated front seats _____________ 87

Viscosity, engine oil _____________ 260

Warning labels ___________________ 7

Warning light, AIR BAG ___________ 37

Warning lights ___________________ 58

Washers ______________________ 202

Washers, windshield _____________ 203

Washing the car ________________ 241

Waxing and polishing ____________ 242

Wear indicators, tires _____________ 224

What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ______________________ 38

Wheel replacement ______________ 227

Wheel, change _________________ 236

Wheels and tires ________________ 266

Wheels and tires, sizes ___________ 266

When it is time for new tires _______ 224

Windshield washers ______________ 77

Windshield wipers ________________ 77

Winter tires ________________233, 266

Wiper blades, replacing ___________ 202

Wipers and washers __________77, 202

Xenon headlight ________________ 204

95_U S_M 07.book Page 275 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

276 Index

95_U S_M 07.book Page 276 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

277Notes

Notes

95_U S_M 07.book Page 277 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

278 Notes

95_U S_M 07.book Page 278 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

279Notes

95_U S_M 07.book Page 279 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

280 Notes

95_U S_M 07.book Page 280 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

281Notes

95_U S_M 07.book Page 281 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

282 Notes

95_U S_M 07.book Page 282 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

283Notes

95_U S_M 07.book Page 283 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

284 Notes

95_U S_M 07.book Page 284 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

285Notes

95_U S_M 07.book Page 285 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

286 Notes

95_U S_M 07.book Page 286 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

287Notes

95_U S_M 07.book Page 287 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

288 Notes

95_U S_M 07.book Page 288 Friday, June 9, 2006 8:58 AM

Saab 2007 9 5 Owners Manual 95_US_M07

Saab-Saab-9-5-2007-Users-Manual-388171 saab-saab-9-5-2007-users-manual-388171

2007 to the manual 3f1e7f0c-e05c-4f58-8ab8-c8b0a13aa1e6

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation